《教法发趣分》的注释巴利
Sāsanapaṭṭhānavāravaṇṇanā
像这样,从各个方面分析了理趣的生起之后,现在要分析教法发趣。因为在“摄分”等当中,只是在根本句上就含摄了发趣,并没有具体地显示出来,所以为了说明“应当从根本句来确定发趣,也应当从发趣来确定根本句”,就说了:“十八根本句应当在哪里见到?应当在教法发趣中见到。”因为根本句和教法发趣互相含摄,这一点前面已经显示过了。那么,“教法发趣”这个词是什么意思呢?教法的发趣,就是教法发趣。教法就是教导,为了随顺所教化者的意乐、成就他们的利益和安乐,以各种方式安立、开展这个教导,这就是教法发趣。不过在这里,是为了显示它这样的状态,所以应当理解为“教法发趣”。或者,教法指的是增上戒学等。因为杂染等法是它们得以进行的方法,依靠这些而安立,所以叫发趣。因为开示这些,所以用邻近的说法,把诸经叫做发趣。又因为它们是这些经的集合,所以这部论典的这个部分就叫发趣。巴利
Evaṃ sabbathā nayasamuṭṭhānaṃ vibhajitvā idāni sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ vibhajanto yasmā saṅgahavārādīsu mūlapadeheva paṭṭhānaṃ saṅgahetvā sarūpato na dassitaṃ, tasmā yathā mūlapadehi paṭṭhānaṃ niddhāretabbaṃ, evaṃ paṭṭhānatopi mūlapadāni niddhāretabbānīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhārasa mūlapadā kuhiṃ daṭṭhabbā? Sāsanapaṭṭhāne’’ti āha. Mūlapadasāsanapaṭṭhānānañhi aññamaññasaṅgaho pubbe dassito evāti. Atha sāsanapaṭṭhānanti ko vacanattho? Sāsanassa paṭṭhānanti sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ , sāsanaṃ desanā, tassā veneyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ tesaṃ hitasukhanipphādanatthaṃ pakārehi ṭhānaṃ pavatti sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ. Idha pana tassa tathābhāvadīpanaṃ ‘‘sāsanapaṭṭhāna’’nti veditabbaṃ. Atha vā sāsanaṃ adhisīlasikkhādayo. Tesaṃ pavattanupāyabhāvato patiṭṭhahanti etehīti paṭṭhānāni, saṃkilesādidhammā. Tesaṃ pavedanato tadupacārena suttāni paṭṭhānāni. Tesaṃ pana samūhabhāvato ayaṃ pakaraṇappadeso paṭṭhānaṃ nāma.
另一种解释方式:为什么叫“发趣”?它的意思是“已经出发”,也就是“行走”。比如经文里说“那些从牛棚出发的牛”,这里说的“发趣”就是指它们已经出发了,所以这个意思就是行走。这样一来,在那些还没有详细展开的理趣中,无所执着的教说智慧在运作时,涉及杂染分、世间分等类别,以及这两者混合的类别,因为从已经详细展开的理趣中获得了这些内容,所以它们以无所执着的方式运行,因此杂染分等法和世间分等法,无论各自分开还是混合,都作为论题而被称为“发趣”。由于它们被开显出来,所以应当知道,这部论典的这个部分就叫作“发趣”。巴利
Aparo nayo – kenaṭṭhena paṭṭhānaṃ? Paṭṭhitaṭṭhena gamanaṭṭhenāti attho. ‘‘Ye te goṭṭhā paṭṭhitagāvo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.156) āgataṭṭhānasmiñhi yena paṭṭhānena te ‘‘goṭṭhā paṭṭhitagāvo’’ti vuttā, taṃ atthato gamanaṃ hoti. Iti nātivitthāritanayesu hāranayesu anissaṅgagamanassa desanāñāṇassa saṃkilesabhāgiyādilokiyādibhedesu tadubhayavomissakabhedesu ca vitthāritanayalābhato nissaṅgavasena pavattagamanattā te saṃkilesabhāgiyādayo lokiyādayo ca visuṃ visuṃ vomissā ca adhikaraṇavasena paṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Tesaṃ pakāsanato ayaṃ pakaraṇappadeso paṭṭhānanti veditabbaṃ.
在“杂染部分”等说法中,因为通过它而被杂染,所以叫杂染。在杂染的部分、杂染的类别中运作的,就是杂染部分。习行就是福德修习,在习行的部分中运作的,是习行部分;或者因为使人亲近习行,所以叫习行部分。通达就是摧破贪蕴等,叫通达。在通达的部分中运作的,或者因为使人亲近通达,所以叫通达部分。圆满修完学法的无学圣者,在无学的状态中运作的,或者因为使人亲近无学,所以叫无学部分。在这些当中,凡是开示渴爱等杂染的,这是杂染部分。凡是开示布施等福行事的,这是习行部分。凡是开示有学戒蕴等的,这是通达部分。凡是开示无学戒蕴等的,这是无学部分。其余的经,则是按照它们混合的方式来说的。巴利
‘‘Saṃkilesabhāgiya’’ntiādīsu saṃkilissati etenāti saṃkileso. Saṃkilesabhāge saṃkilesakoṭṭhāse pavattaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ. Vāsanā puññabhāvanā, vāsanābhāge pavattaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ, vāsanaṃ bhajāpetīti vā vāsanābhāgiyaṃ. Nibbijjhanaṃ lobhakkhandhādīnaṃ padālanaṃ nibbedho. Nibbedhabhāge pavattaṃ, nibbedhaṃ bhajāpetīti vā nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ. Pariniṭṭhitasikkhādhammā asekkhā, asekkhabhāve pavattaṃ, asekkhe bhajāpetīti vā asekkhabhāgiyaṃ. Tesu yattha taṇhādisaṃkileso vibhatto, idaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ. Yattha dānādipuññakiriyavatthu vibhattaṃ, idaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ. Yattha sekkhā sīlakkhandhādayo vibhattā, idaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ. Yattha pana asekkhā sīlakkhandhādayo vibhattā, idaṃ asekkhabhāgiyaṃ. Itarāni tesaṃ vomissakanayavasena vuttāni.
不过,这六组二法、四组三法、一组四法,再加另一组四法,合起来共有十二种。其中四组二法和两组三法已经列出,其余的没有列出,不列出并没有什么特别原因。按照这个方式,其余的也可以掌握,应当理解为在巴利圣典中是简略说的。正如接下来会说:“这四部经,若作成共通,就变成八部”等等。在这里,因为有的经只讲渴爱杂染,有的经只讲邪见杂染,有的经只讲恶行杂染,所以把杂染分经分成三种来列出,即“渴爱杂染分经”等等。同样,所谓清净,是在有杂染时才存在的,所以清净分经也依照杂染的分类,只分成三种来列出,即“渴爱清净分经”等等。不过从义理上说,它们其实就是习行分等。而这个理路,在某些抄本中是没有的。巴利
Tāni pana cha dukā cattāro tikā ekaṃ catukkaṃ aparampi ekaṃ catukkanti dvādasa honti. Tesu cattāro dukā dve ca tikā uddhaṭā, itare na uddhaṭā, anuddharaṇe kāraṇaṃ natthi. Iminā nayena tepi gahetuṃ sakkāti pāḷiyaṃ saṃkhittāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati – ‘‘imāni cattāri suttāni, sādhāraṇāni katāni aṭṭha bhavantī’’tiādi. Tattha yasmā katthaci sutte taṇhāsaṃkilesova niddisīyati, katthaci diṭṭhisaṃkilesova, katthaci duccaritasaṃkilesova niddisīyati, tasmā saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ tidhā vibhajitvā uddiṭṭhaṃ ‘‘taṇhāsaṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ sutta’’ntiādinā. Tathā vodānaṃ nāma saṃkilese sati hotīti vodānabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ saṃkilesavibhāgena tidhāva uddiṭṭhaṃ ‘‘taṇhāvodānabhāgiyaṃ sutta’’ntiādinā. Taṃ pana atthato vāsanābhāgiyādi eva hoti. Ayañca nayo kesuci potthakesu natthi.
“其中,杂染有三种”等这段话,是为了从杂染的对立面出发,通过确定止等法来显示习行分等经的所缘范围而开始的。其中,“如果对诸有生起执著”,意思是说,对那些无法舍弃诸有中欲贪的人,如果生起了对存在的希求。“如此”,是说对这样的人而言,这种由止观修习所成的福行事,因为能产生应受供养的存在的果报,所以成为这样的。“导致往生其处”,就是导致投生到各处诸有之中。“这四种经”,就是这些杂染分等四种经。“作共通”,是把杂染分和习行分、杂染分和决择分、杂染分和无学分、习行分和决择分这样搭配组合,通过结合不同章节而混合在一起。“成为八种”,就是前面四种加上这四种,这样一共成为八种。巴利
‘‘Tattha saṃkileso tividho’’tiādi saṃkilesapaṭipakkhato samathādiniddhāraṇavasena vāsanābhāgiyādisuttānaṃ visayadassanatthaṃ āraddhaṃ. Tattha yadi āsatti uppajjati bhavesūti bhavesu chandarāgaṃ pajahituṃ asakkontassa yadi bhavapatthanā uppajjati. Evaṃ sāyanti evamassa puggalassa ayaṃ samathavipassanābhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu bhavati pujjabhavaphalanibbattanato. Tatrūpapattiyā saṃvattatīti tatra tatra bhave upapattiyā saṃvattati. Imāni cattāri suttānīti imāni saṃkilesabhāgiyādīni cattāri suttāni. Sādhāraṇāni katānīti saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca, saṃkilesabhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca, saṃkilesabhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca, vāsanābhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañcāti evaṃ padantarasaṃyojanavasena missitāni katāni. Aṭṭha bhavantīti purimāni cattāri imāni cattārīti evaṃ aṭṭha bhavanti.
这八部经本身通过共通组合,就成了十六部。也就是说,前面说的那八部经,与习行分、无学分、决择分组合;无学分与杂染分、习行分组合;决择分与杂染分、习行分组合;无学分与杂染分、决择分组合;无学分与习行分、决择分组合;无学分与杂染分、习行分、决择分组合;决择分与无学分、非杂染分、非习行分、非无学分组合。这样作成共通组合后,前八部加上这八部,就成了十六部。其中,应当知道有四个单法、六对二法、四组三法、一个四法,还有另一个四法,这种分类也要了解。而且在这里,应当知道有两对二法、两组三法、两个四法,是圣典中没有提到的。巴利
Tāniyeva aṭṭha suttāni sādhāraṇāni katāni soḷasa bhavantīti tāniyeva yathāvuttāni aṭṭha suttāni vāsanābhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca, asekkhabhāgiyañca saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca, nibbedhabhāgiyañca saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca, asekkhabhāgiyañca saṃkilesabhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca, asekkhabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca, asekkhabhāgiyañca saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca, nibbedhabhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca nevasaṃkilesabhāgiyañca, navāsanābhāgiyañca nanibbedhabhāgiyañca na asekkhabhāgiyañcāti evaṃ sādhāraṇāni katāni purimāni aṭṭha imāni aṭṭhāti soḷasa bhavanti. Tesu cattāro ekakā, cha dukā, cattāro tikā, eko catukko, aparopi eko catukkoti ayampi vibhāgo veditabbo. Tatthāpi dve dukā, dve tikā, dve catukkā ca pāḷiyaṃ anāgatāti veditabbā.
现在,为了说明这部《发趣论》涵盖了整个教法,所以说道:“用这十六种经来区分时,九种经就被区分开来。”这句话的意思是:按照《发趣论》的方式,用属于杂染分等的这十六种经来区分时,被称为教法之教的九种经——也就是经、应颂等——就被区分、分析为十六种。这里的意趣是:教法之中没有任何一个部分不被这十六种发趣所涵盖。那么,怎么判断它属于杂染分等呢?回答说:“由一偈类推另一偈”等等。其中,“由一偈类推另一偈”的意思是:就像这一偈是杂染分,另一偈也应被类推为杂染分,或习行分,或抉择分,或无学分,应当随顺推度、思量而了知。其余文句也是同样的道理。在这里应当知道,除了偈颂和记说之外的一切教法,都被“经”这个词所涵盖。巴利
Idāni imassa paṭṭhānassa sakalasāsanasaṅgahitabhāvaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘imehi soḷasahi suttehi bhinnehi navavidhaṃ suttaṃ bhinnaṃ bhavatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassattho – imehi saṃkilesabhāgiyādīhi soḷasahi suttehi paṭṭhānanayena vibhattehi suttageyyādinavavidhaṃ pariyattisāsanasaṅkhātaṃ suttaṃ bhinnaṃ soḷasadhā vibhattaṃ hoti. Iminā soḷasavidhena paṭṭhānena asaṅgahito pariyattisāsanassa padeso natthīti adhippāyo. Kathaṃ pana saṃkilesabhāgiyādibhāvo gahetabboti? Āha ‘‘gāthāya gāthā anuminitabbā’’tiādi. Tattha gāthāya gāthā anuminitabbāti ayaṃ gāthā viya gāthā saṃkilesabhāgiyāti vā vāsanābhāgiyāti vā nibbedhabhāgiyāti vā asekkhabhāgiyāti vā anuminitabbā, anu anu minitvā takketvā jānitabbāti attho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca gāthāveyyākaraṇavinimuttā sabbā pariyatti ‘‘suttenā’’tipadena saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbā.
现在,为了用实例来说明前面已经指出的那些属于杂染分的经等,开始解说“其中,什么是属于杂染分的经”等内容。其中,“被欲所盲、被网所覆”这一偈的意思,前面已经说过了。就像对这一偈一样,从这以后,对于前面已经解释过含义的地方以及文句浅显的地方,我们也不再解释它们的含义。巴利
Idāni saṃkilesabhāgiyādīni suttāni yathāniddiṭṭhāni udāharaṇavasena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ sutta’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘kāmandhā jālasañchannā’’ti gāthāya attho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Yathā imassa, evaṃ ito parānampi heṭṭhā vuttatthānaṃ uttānapadānañca atthaṃ na vaṇṇayissāma.
“行非行处”是指以身等去不该去的地方,意思是做不该做的事。“由欲”是指因欲、以欲求为条件。“行非行处”是指走向不该走的方向,意思是做不该做的事。“法”是指善士、圣者之法。“超越”是指越过而违犯。“退堕”是指衰损。“声誉”是指称誉和随从。巴利
Agatigamanānīti kāyādīhi ayuttagamanāni, akattabbakaraṇānīti attho. Chandāti chandahetu icchāpaccayā. Agatiṃ gacchatīti agantabbaṃ gatiṃ gacchati, akattabbaṃ karotīti attho. Dhammanti sādhūnaṃ ariyānaṃ dhammaṃ. Ativattatīti atimadditvā vītikkamati. Nihīyatīti hāyati. Yasoti kitti ca parivāro ca.
在“诸法意先行”这句偈颂里,“意”虽然可以泛指欲界善心等一切四地之心,但在这里,因为结合了眼护长老前世当医生时生起的心来看,实际能确定的只是与嗔恚相应的心。这个意是这些法的先行者,所以叫“意先行”,意思是这些法具有以意为先导、以意为首先生起者的性质。“法”是指没有众生、没有命我意义上的法,具体就是受等三种无色蕴。因为这些蕴确实是意先行的。那么,在同一事、同一所缘、同一刹那中生起的意,怎么能算是和它们同时生起的法的“先行者”呢?这是从生起缘的意义上说的。比如许多人一起做劫村之类的恶事时,如果问“谁是他们的先行者”,那个作为他们条件的人,他们依靠他去做那件事的人,不管是雇主还是朋友,就被称为他们的先行者。这里的道理也应这样理解。所以,从生起缘的意义上说,意是这些法的先行者,因此叫“意先行”。因为如果意不生起,这些法就不可能生起;而意即使在某些心所不生起时,也仍然能够生起。巴利
‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’ti gāthāyaṃ manoti yadipi kāmāvacarakusalādibhedaṃ sabbampi catubhūmakacittaṃ mano, imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne cakkhupālattherassa (dha. pa. 1-2; theragā. 95) purimajātiyaṃ vejjabhūtassa uppannavasena niyamiyamānaṃ paṭighasampayuttacittameva labbhati. So mano pubbaṅgamo etesanti manopubbaṅgamā, manasā paṭhamagāminā samannāgatāti attho. Dhammāti nissattanijjīvaṭṭhena dhammā, te pana vedanādayo tayo arūpino khandhā. Ete hi manopubbaṅgamā. Kathaṃ panetehi saddhiṃ ekasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ ekasmiñca ārammaṇe ekakkhaṇe uppajjamāno mano pubbaṅgamo nāma hotīti? Uppādapaccayaṭṭhena. Yathā hi bahūsu ekato gāmaghātādikammāni karontesu ‘‘ko etesaṃ pubbaṅgamo’’ti vutte yo tesaṃ paccayo hoti, yaṃ yaṃ nissāya te taṃ kammaṃ karonti, so datto vā mitto vā tesaṃ pubbaṅgamoti vuccati, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Iti uppādapaccayaṭṭhena mano pubbaṅgamo etesanti manopubbaṅgamā. Na hi te mane anuppajjante uppajjituṃ sakkuṇanti, mano pana ekaccesu cetasikesu anuppajjantesupi uppajjati eva.
以增上(主导)的意义来说,意是这些法中最殊胜的,所以叫“意最上”。就像在盗贼等人群中,贼首之类是主导者、是最上的,同样,意也是这些法中最上的。又像由木头等做成的东西,被称为木制品等,同样,这些法因为是由意所做成,所以叫“意所成”。“以被污染的心”:就是被贪欲等过失污染、败坏的心,来说话或行动。因为他在说话时,说的只是四种语恶行;在做时,做的只是三种身恶行;即使不说话也不行动,也因被贪欲等污染了心,而圆满三种意恶行。这样,他的十不善业道就得以圆满。因此,“苦追随他”:就是由于这三种恶行,苦追随那个人,凭恶行的力量在四恶趣中跟着他。像什么呢?“如车轮随拉车者的足”:就像拉车的公牛,车轮紧跟着它的足迹转动,同样,苦也这样跟着那个人。巴利
Adhipativasena mano seṭṭho etesanti manoseṭṭhā. Yathā hi corādīnaṃ corajeṭṭhakādayo adhipatino seṭṭhā, tathā tesampi mano seṭṭho. Yathā pana dāruādīhi nipphannāni bhaṇḍāni dārumayādīni nāma honti, tathā etepi manato nipphannattā manomayā nāma. Paduṭṭhenāti abhijjhādīhi dosehi paduṭṭhena dūsitena bhāsati vā karoti vā. So hi bhāsanto catubbidhaṃ vacīduccaritameva bhāsati, karontopi tividhaṃ kāyaduccaritameva karoti, abhāsanto akaronto tehi abhijjhādīhi paduṭṭhamanatāya tividhaṃ manoduccaritaṃ pūreti. Evamassa dasa akusalakammapathā pāripūriṃ gacchanti. Tato naṃ dukkhamanvetīti tato tividhaduccaritato taṃ puggalaṃ dukkhaṃ anveti duccaritānubhāvena catūsu apāyesu dukkhaṃ anugacchati. Yathā kiṃ? Cakkaṃva vahato padanti, yathā nāma sakaṭaṃ vahato balībaddassa padaṃ paharantaṃ cakkaṃ anugacchati, evaṃ naṃ puggalaṃ dukkhamanugacchatīti.
在“昏沉者何时有”这一偈中,“昏沉者”指被昏沉和睡眠压倒的人。“大食者”指食量极大的人,就像那些边吃边抓、衣服沾满食物、在鸟群中捡食、吃乌鸦吐出的残食、吃下去又吐出来的人中的某一种。“嗜睡者”指习惯睡觉的人。“辗转而卧者”指一味追求躺卧之乐和侧卧之乐、习惯翻来覆去躺着睡的人。“被饵食喂养者”指被米糠之类的猪食喂养的猪。家猪从小就被养着,到身体肥大时,出不了家门,只能在床下等处翻来覆去,一边喘气一边躺着。这里说的是:当一个人既昏沉又吃得极多,像被饵食喂养的大猪一样,无法用其他姿势维持生活,嗜睡成性,翻来覆去地躺着,那时他就无法作意无常、苦、无我这三相。因为不作意这三相,他智慧迟钝,一次又一次入胎,无法从母胎中解脱。巴利
‘‘Middhī yadā hotī’’ti gāthāyaṃ middhīti thinamiddhābhibhūto. Mahagghasoti mahābhojano āharahatthakaalaṃsāṭakatatravaṭṭakakākamāsakabhuttavamitakānaṃ aññataro viya. Niddāyitāti supanasīlo. Samparivattasāyīti seyyasukhapassasukhānaṃ anuyuñjanavasena samparivattakasayanasīlo . Nivāpapuṭṭhoti kuṇḍakādinā sūkarabhattena puṭṭho. Gharasūkaro hi bālakālato paṭṭhāya posiyamāno thūlasarīrakāle gehato bahi nikkhamituṃ alabhanto heṭṭhāmañcādīsu samparivattitvā samparivattitvā assasanto passasanto sayateva. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yadā puriso middhī ca hoti mahagghaso ca, nivāpapuṭṭho mahāvarāho viya aññena iriyāpathena yāpetuṃ asakkonto niddāsīlo saṃparivattasāyī, tadā so ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā’’ti tīṇi lakkhaṇāni manasi kātuṃ na sakkoti. Tesaṃ amanasikārā mandapañño punappunaṃ gabbhaṃ upeti, gabbhavāsato na parimuccatīti.
在“如铁锈”这一偈中,“铁”指从铁而来。“生起”指生出来的锈。“从那里生起”指从铁那里生起之后(“从那里生起”也就是从该处生起之后,却又反噬该处)。关于“过度洗除者”:“洗除”是指这样的智慧——在受用四种资具时,先审察“靠这个资具维持生活,有这些就够了”,然后才受用。超越这种智慧而行的人,就叫“过度洗除者”。这里要表达的是:就像铁锈从铁本身生起,从哪块铁生起,就反过来腐蚀、毁坏那块铁一样;同样,不审察就受用四种资具、超越这种智慧而行的人,他们自己的业由于从自身相续生起,那些属于自己的业将他们引向恶趣。巴利
‘‘Ayasāva mala’’nti gāthāyaṃ ayasāti ayato. Samuṭṭhitanti jātaṃ. Tatuṭṭhāyāti tato uṭṭhahitvā. Atidhonacārinanti dhonā vuccati cattāro paccaye idamatthitāya alametenāti paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjanapaññā, taṃ atikkamitvā caranto atidhonacārī nāma. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā ayato malaṃ samuṭṭhāya yato taṃ samuṭṭhitaṃ, tameva khādati vināseti, evamevaṃ cattāro paccaye appaccavekkhitvā paribhuñjantaṃ atidhonacārinaṃ sāni kammāni attano santāne uṭṭhitattā attano santakāneva tāni kammāni duggatiṃ nayantīti.
在“如盗贼”这一偈中,“盗贼在破墙处被捉”,意思是说,就像盗贼凿开屋墙,正要进屋时,就在那墙洞处被国王的差役捉住。“他因自己的业而被击打、被捆绑”,就是说,由于他自己所造的业,他遭到鞭打等击打,也被镣铐等捆绑。同样,“此世作恶之人,死后在他世”也是如此:造恶的人死后到了他世,“因自己的业而被击打、被捆绑”,就是说,由于他自己所造的恶业,在地狱等处,被狱卒等以种种方式击打和捆绑。巴利
‘‘Coro yathā’’ti gāthāyaṃ coro yathā sandhimukhe gahītoti yathā coro gharasandhiṃ chinditvā gehaṃ pavisanto gharasandhimukhe eva rājapurisehi gahito. Sakammunā haññati bajjhate cāti tena attanā katakammena kasābhitāḷanādinā haññati ceva addubandhanādinā bajjhati ca. Evaṃ ayaṃ pecca pajā paratthāti evampi ayaṃ pāpakārinī pajā ito cavitvā paraloke. Sakammunā haññati bajjhate cāti attanāva katena pāpakammena nirayādīsu nānappakārehi kammakāraṇādīhi haññati ceva paribajjhati cāti.
在“Sukhakāmāni”(希求安乐者)这一偈中,“以杖伤害者”是指有人用棍棒或土块等东西去伤害别人。“死后他得不到安乐”:这个人来世既得不到人间的安乐,也得不到天界的安乐,至于涅槃的安乐,那更不用说了。巴利
‘‘Sukhakāmānī’’ti gāthāyaṃ yo daṇḍena vihiṃsatīti yo puggalo daṇḍena vā leḍḍuādīhi vā vibādhati. Pecca so na labhe sukhanti so puggalo paraloke manussasukhaṃ vā dibbasukhaṃ vā na labhati, nibbānasukhe pana vattabbameva natthi.
母牛们正在渡过大河的时候。如果领头的公牛走弯路,也就是牛群的首领公牛走弯路的话。所有那些母牛也都跟着走弯路。为什么?因为向导走了弯路。意思是说,当引领者走上弯路时,正由于引领者走在弯路上。因为那头领头公牛是它们的依靠,也是替它们消除危险的存在。巴利
Gunnaṃce taramānānanti gāvīsu mahoghaṃ tarantīsu. Jimhaṃ gacchati puṅgavoti yadi yūthapati usabho kuṭilaṃ gacchati. Sabbā tā jimhaṃ gacchantīti sabbāpi tā gāviyo kuṭilameva gacchanti. Kasmā? Nette jimhaṃ gate satīti nettari kuṭilaṃ gate sati, nettassa kuṭilaṃ gatattāti attho. So hi tāsaṃ paccayiko upaddavaharo ca.
就像“同样地”这句偈颂里说的:正如这个道理,如果在人群中被人尊为领袖的那个人,是个行非法的人,那么依靠他生活的所有人,也都成了非法的人。因为物质的丰足,确实会导致人与生俱来的习性的产生。正因为如此,如果国王是个行非法的人,整个国家就都沉浸于苦难。“实在是极为困苦啊”:意思是确实陷入了极大的苦难。“依著于诸依止”:是指对欲乐之依止等。“染著”:是指被贪欲所制伏。“为苦”:就是苦。巴利
‘‘Evameva’’nti gāthāyaṃ yathā cetaṃ, evamevaṃ yo manussesu padhānasammato, yadi so adhammacārī siyā. Ye tassa anujīvino, sabbepi adhammikāva honti. Sāmisampadā hi pakatisampadaṃ sampādeti. Yasmā ca etadeva, tasmā sabbaṃ raṭṭhaṃ dukkhaṃ seti, rājā ce hoti adhammiko. Sukiccharūpā vatāti suṭṭhu kicchāpannarūpā vata. Upadhīsūti kāmaguṇūpadhīsu. Rattāti rāgābhibhūtā. Kaṭukanti dukkhaṃ.
芭蕉因为结果实而自身毁灭,所以说“果实确实害死芭蕉”。同样,因为这些草本植物以结果实为终点,所以说“果实害死竹子,果实害死芦苇”。母马肚子里怀了驴的种,生下来的就叫驴骡。这驴骡怀胎之后,到了时候却生不出来,只能四蹄刨地,痛苦地站着。这时人们把它的四条腿绑在四根木桩上,剖开它的肚子把小骡取出来,母骡当场就死了。因此说“犹如胎儿害死母骡”。这段话的意思是:就像芭蕉、竹子、芦苇被自己结的果实毁掉,胎儿害死母骡一样,作为自己业报的恭敬利养,也会毁掉不善的人。巴利
Kukkuccajanakeneva pattavaṭṭippabhavassa upacchinnattā phaluppatti kadaliyā parābhavāya hotīti āha – ‘‘phalaṃ ve kadaliṃ hantī’’ti. Tathā phalapariyosānattā osadhīnaṃ ‘‘phalaṃ veḷuṃ phalaṃ naḷa’’nti vuttaṃ. Vaḷavāya kucchismiṃ gadrabhassa jātā assatarī nāma, sā gabbhaṃ gaṇhitvā kāle sampatte vijāyituṃ na sakkoti. Pādehi bhūmiṃ paharantī tiṭṭhati, athassa cattāro pāde catūsu khāṇukesu bandhitvā kucchiṃ phāletvā potakaṃ nīharanti, sā tattheva marati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘gabbho assatariṃ yathā’’ti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā attano phalaṃ kadaliveḷunaḷepi vināseti, gabbho ca assatariṃ, evaṃ attano kammaphalabhūto sakkāro asappurisaṃ vināsetīti.
忿怒与覆藏是重的:把以嗔怒为特征的忿怒,以及以覆藏他人功德为特征的覆藏,看得重、举得高、抬起来,带着它们到处走。在良田里,也一样。就像腐烂的种子,意思是说,因为没有经过粪汁等浸泡、晾干、妥善存放等处理,种子本身就有了毛病,成了坏掉的种子。巴利
Kodhamakkhagarūti kujjhanalakkhaṇaṃ kodhaṃ, paraguṇamakkhanalakkhaṇaṃ makkhañca garuṃ katvā uddhaṃ katvā ukkhipitvā caranto. Sukhetteti sukhettepi. Pūtibījaṃvāti pūtibhāvaṃ gataṃ bījaṃ viya. Chakaṇarasādiparibhāvanasukkhāpanasukhasayādīni akaraṇena bījadosaduṭṭhanti attho.
以心,就是用自己的心。心,就是指那个人自己的心。限定,就是划定。转起,就是活动运作。如其所持,就是像随便拿来放着的那样。巴利
Cetasāti attano cittena. Cetoti tassa puggalassa cittaṃ. Pariccāti paricchinditvā. Iriyatīti pavattati. Yathābhatanti yathā kiñci āharitvā ṭhapitaṃ.
“不要做”就是不要去做。“没有解脱”就是不存在解脱。“即便是故意”就是即便有意去做,也就是事先经过思虑的意思。巴利
Mākatthāti mā akattha. Na pamutyatthīti pamokkho natthi. Upeccāpīti sañciccāpi, buddhipubbenāpīti attho.
说了“以不如法”之后,又说“以妄语”,是为了显示妄语具有极大的罪过。因此才说“超越了这一法的人……”等等(《法句经》176),同样也说“罗睺罗,对于那些在故意妄语时都不感到惭愧的人,他们的沙门性实在太过渺小了”等等(《中部》2.108)。“那怎么会这样呢”:那份财富对他们来说,将以什么方式存在?因为他们是以不如法的手段积聚的,所以那份财富在他们那里不会长久存在,这就是意思。“将会有障碍”:由于不如法的交易等,将会有来自国王等方面的障碍。“su”只是一个小品词。“所积聚的会灭去”:这样积聚的、预备的东西会灭去。“Sagga”指善趣。因为善趣凭借色等美妙的事物而被视为最上,所以名为“天”。至此,宣说了现世利益和来世利益的损毁。“破坏了”即毁坏了。巴利
‘‘Adhammenā’’ti vatvāpi ‘‘musāvādenā’’ti vacanaṃ musāvādassa mahāsāvajjabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘ekaṃ dhammaṃ atītassā’’tiādi (dha. pa. 176), tathā ‘‘evaṃ parittaṃ kho, rāhula, tesaṃ sāmaññaṃ, yesaṃ natthi sampajānamusāvāde lajjā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 2.108). Taṃ kathaṃ nu bhavissatīti taṃ dhanaṃ kena nu pakārena tesaṃ bhavissati. Adhammena tesaṃ sambhatattā tesu naciraṭṭhitikaṃ hotīti attho. Antarāyā su bhavissantīti adhammiyavohārādito rājantarāyādayo bhavissanti. Sūti nipātamattaṃ. Sambhatassa vinassatīti imassa sambhataṃ sajjitaṃ vinassati. Sagganti sugatiṃ. Sā hi rūpādīhi sobhanehi aggoti saggoti adhippetā. Ettāvatāti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikānaṃ atthānaṃ hāniyā. Hatāti vinaṭṭhā.
“退转”就是退堕。因为贪而挖掘自己,意思是:以贪为因去造作不善业,通过身体行恶等方式,他就是在挖掘自己。“从朋友中衰损”,是指从朋友的关系中退失。巴利
Vivaṭṭateti nivaṭṭati. Lobhā khaṇati attānanti lobhahetu apuññāni karonto kāyavisamādiyogena attānaṃ khaṇati nāma. Mittehi jīratīti mittabhāvehi hāyati.
他们游走”是说:他们以四种威仪,只造不善业而四处游走。“愚者”是说:不了知此世利益和他世利益的人,在这里就叫愚者。“劣慧者”是说没有智慧。因为所谓“慧的败坏”根本不存在。“犹如怨敌”是说:成为像怨敌一样、像仇敌一样。“苦果”是指果报锐利,意思就是苦果。那种能让人投生到地狱等处、带来苦果的业,做了之后,每当回忆起来就会懊悔、忧伤;那样的业做了并不好、不美、不是善。“他泪流满面”:那人泪水盈面,哭泣着领受、品尝着异熟。巴利
Carantīti catūhi iriyāpathehi akusalameva karontā vicaranti. Bālāti idhalokatthaṃ paralokatthañca ajānantā idha bālā nāma. Dummedhāti nippaññā. Na hi paññāya duṭṭhattaṃ nāma atthi. Amittenevāti amittabhūtena viya verinā viya hutvā. Kaṭukapphalanti tikhiṇaphalaṃ, dukkhaphalanti attho. Na taṃ kammaṃ kataṃ sādhu, yaṃ katvā anutappatīti yaṃ kammaṃ nirayādīsu nibbattanasamatthaṃ dukkhudayaṃ katvā anussaritānussaritakkhaṇe anutappati anusocati, taṃ kataṃ na sādhu na sundaraṃ na bhaddakaṃ. Yassa assumukhoti yassa assūhi tintamukho rodanto vipākaṃ paṭisevati anubhoti.
“难作”是指:从履行各种义务等方面来说,增上戒律难以做到,所以叫难作。“难忍”是指:从受持戒律开始,不使它出现破损,尤其要让最初梵行一直维持到临终一念,所以叫难忍;或者说,戒律防护等如果没有周密守护就无法圆满成就,所以叫难作。又因为应当忍耐的事物难以承受,所以从忍辱防护的角度说为难忍。“愚钝者”是指智慧迟钝的人。“沙门性”就是沙门的身份。“于此”是指在那个沙门身份中。“拥挤”是指衣着不整的女人等造成的拥挤。“在那里”是指在那些成为戒律防护障碍的拥挤等不相称的所缘中。或者,为了说明“难作”这个词的含义,才说了“难忍”。“难忍”就是难以忍受、难以承担。“愚钝者”是指愚笨的人。“沙门性”是指沙门法。这里说的是:那些有智慧的善男子,即使十年、二十年……乃至六十年,以齿扣齿,舌抵上颚,以心抑心,奉行一座食、一餐食,终生行持梵行,他们能做成这样的沙门行;而愚者、钝慧者却做不到。“在那里有许多拥挤”是指在那个被称为沙门性的圣道上有许多拥挤,也就是说,为了证得圣道而修行的人会遭遇许多危险。巴利
Dukkaranti vattapaṭivattapūraṇādivasena ābhisamācārikasīlassa kātuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya dukkaraṃ. Samādānato paṭṭhāya khaṇḍaṃ akatvā visesato ādibrahmacariyakassa carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāya duttitikkhaṃ, sīlasaṃvarādayo vā aparikkhate katvā sampādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya dukkaraṃ. Adhivāsetabbānaṃ pana dussahanato khantisaṃvaraṃvasena duttitikkhaṃ. Abyattenāti mandapaññena. Sāmaññanti samaṇabhāvo. Tatthāti tassa sāmaññassa. Sambādhāti dunnivatthaduppārutamātugāmādisammaddā. Yatthāti sīlasaṃvarādīnaṃ paribandhabhūtesu sambādhasaṅkhātesu visabhāgārammaṇādīsu . Atha vā dukkarantipadassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ duttitikkhanti vuttaṃ. Duttitikkhanti dukkhamaṃ duradhivāsiyaṃ. Abyattenāti bālena. Sāmaññanti samaṇadhammo. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yaṃ paṇḍitā kulaputtā dasapi vassāni vīsatipi…pe… saṭṭhipi vassāni dantebhi dantamādhāya jivhāya tāluṃ āhacca cetasā cittaṃ abhiniggaṇhitvā ekāsanaṃ ekabhattaṃ paṭisevamānā āpāṇakoṭikaṃ brahmacariyaṃ carantā sāmaññaṃ karonti, taṃ bālā abyattā kātuṃ na sakkontīti. Bahūhi tattha sambādhāti tasmiṃ sāmaññasaṅkhāte ariyamagge bahū sambādhā, maggādhigamāya paṭipannassa bahū parissayāti attho.
“以有限量衡量无量者”——意思是:以“此人有这么多戒、这么多定、这么多慧”这样的方式,去衡量无量的漏尽者。“有智慧者岂会分别计较”——这里哪有有智慧、有明辨的人会去分别计较呢?只有漏尽者衡量漏尽者,才可能去分别计较。这是在点明这个道理。
“我认为被遮蔽”——如果有凡夫开始想要去衡量阿罗汉,我就认为这个人是被遮蔽的,智慧是颠倒的。
“无慧”——“kissava”就是慧的意思,“akissava”就是没有慧的意思。巴利
Appameyyaṃ paminantoti appameyyaṃ khīṇāsavapuggalaṃ ‘‘ettakasīlo ayaṃ ettakasamādhi ettakapañño’’ti evaṃ minanto. Kodha vidvā vikappayeti ko idha vidvā medhāvī vikappeyya, khīṇāsavova khīṇāsavaṃ minanto vikappeyyāti dīpeti. Nivutaṃ maññeti yo pana puthujjano minetuṃ ārabhati, taṃ nivutaṃ avakujjapaññaṃ maññāmi. Akissavanti kissavā vuccati paññā, nippaññanti attho.
所谓“斧头”,是指以砍伤自己的方式而像斧头一样的粗恶语。所谓“砍断”,是说它砍在被称为善根的根本上,就在那根上直接斩断。所谓“像哈拉哈拉毒一样”,就是像被称为哈拉哈拉的毒一样。所谓“这样让失坏的人堕落”,是说就这样把失坏、犯错、跌倒的人丢进恶趣里。所谓“如同言语被恶说”,是说如同以圣者的诽谤方式而言语被恶说。巴利
Kuṭhārīti attacchedakaṭṭhena kuṭhārisadisī pharusavācā. Chindatīti kusalamūlasaṅkhāte mūleyeva nikantati. Visaṃ halāhalaṃ ivāti halāhalasaṅkhātaṃ visaṃ iva. Evaṃ viraddhaṃ pātetīti viraddhaṃ aparaddhaṃ khalitapuggalaṃ evaṃ apāyesu vinipāteti. Vācā dubbhāsitā yathāti yathā vācā ariyūpavādanavasena dubbhāsitā.
“Nindiyanti”说的是应受谴责。“Taṃ vā nindati yo pasaṃsiyoti”:如果有人本该因功德殊胜而值得称赞,他却拿恶欲之类的罪名去指责他。“Vicinātīti”意思是积聚。“Kalinti”意思是过失。“Ayaṃ kalīti”意思是这就是过失。“Akkhesūti”指在掷骰子赌博中。“Sabbassāpi sahāpi attanāti”意思是连自己的全部财产,连同自己一起。“Sugatesūti”指因善行、因到达善处、因正行、因正说而称为善逝的诸佛等。“Manaṃ padosayeti”:若有人污染其心,则说这就是他的意恶,是极大的过失。为什么?因为“sataṃ sahassānaṃ…pe… pāpakanti”。其中,“sataṃ sahassānanti”按尼罗浮陀数是一十万。“Chattiṃsatīti”是另外三十六尼罗浮陀。“Pañca cāti”按阿浮陀数则是五阿浮陀。因此,以年数计算,这么长的时间,即他怀着对圣者的谴责之语和心,投生恶趣地狱,在那里受苦,这样说。这里略说则是莲花地狱的寿量,详细情况后面将会说到。巴利
Nindiyanti nindanīyaṃ. Taṃ vā nindati yo pasaṃsiyoti yo guṇavisiṭṭhatāya pasaṃsāraho puggalo, taṃ vā so pāpicchatādīni āropetvā garahati. Vicinātīti upacināti. Kalinti aparādhaṃ. Ayaṃ kalīti ayaṃ aparādho. Akkhesūti jūtakīḷanakkhesu. Sabbassāpi sahāpi attanāti sabbena attano dhanenāpi attanāpi saddhiṃ. Sugatesūti sobhanagamanattā, sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gatattā, sammā gatattā, sammā ca gadattā sugatasaṅkhātesu buddhādīsu. Manaṃ padosayeti yo manaṃ padoseyya, tassa ayaṃ manopadoso eva mahattaro kalīti vuttaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā sataṃ sahassānaṃ…pe… pāpakanti. Tattha sataṃ sahassānanti nirabbudagaṇanāya satasahassaṃ. Chattiṃsatīti aparāni chattiṃsati nirabbudāni. Pañca cāti abbudagaṇanāya pañca ca abbudāni. Tasmā vassagaṇanāya ettako so kālo, yaṃ kālaṃ ariyagarahivācaṃ manañca paṇidhāya pāpakaṃ nirayaṃ upeti, tattha paccatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Idañca saṅkhepena padumaniraye āyuppamāṇaṃ, vitthārena pana parato āgamissati.
贪功德:因为被愚人看作是一种“功德”,又因为反复生起,所以贪本身就是“贪功德”;在那贪功德中,意思就是渴爱。Anuyutta 指一再投入、随逐。Avadaññū 指不听劝告的人,因为连诸佛的教诫也不接受。Maccharī 指具有五种悭吝的悭吝者。Pesuṇiyaṃ anuyutta 指热衷于离间语,以分裂上首弟子故。因为拘迦利临终时,具寿大目犍连尊者教诫他,说了这些偈颂。Mukhaduggā 指口出恶语、言辞粗恶。Vibhūtā 指真实已失,说虚诳语。Anariyā 指非善人。Bhūnahū 指毁坏福祉者、毁坏自己智慧的人。Purisantā 指最下劣的人。Kalī 指不祥之人。Avajātakaputtā 指佛陀世尊的劣子。Mā bahubhāṇidha nerayikosīti 指你现在不要再喋喋不休了,你已经成了地狱众生。Rajamākirasīti 指你把烦恼的尘垢投到自己身上。Sante 指烦恼已止息、诸漏已尽的人。Kibbisakārī 指作恶之人。Papatanti narakaṃ 指他们堕入地狱。巴利
Lobhaguṇeti ‘‘guṇo’’ti bālehi diṭṭhattā, anekakkhattuṃ pavattitattā ca lobhoyeva lobhaguṇo, tasmiṃ lobhaguṇe, taṇhāyāti attho. Anuyuttoti anu anu yutto. Avadaññūti avacanaññū, buddhānampi ovādassa aggahaṇato. Maccharīti pañcavidhamacchariyena maccharī. Pesuṇiyaṃ anuyuttoti pesuṇiyasmiṃ anuyutto aggasāvakānaṃ bhedanena. Kokālikañhi mīyamānaṃ ovadantena āyasmatā mahāmoggallānena bhāsitā imā gāthāti. Mukhaduggāti mukhavisama. Vibhūtāti vigatabhūta alikavādi. Anariyāti asappurisa. Bhūnahūti bhūtihanaka attano buddhivināsaka. Purisantāti purisādhama. Kalīti alakkhipurisa. Avajātakaputtāti buddhassa bhagavato avajātaputta. Mā bahubhāṇidha nerayikosīti idāni bahubhāṇī mā hohi, nerayiko asi jāto. Rajamākirasīti kilesarajaṃ attani pakkhipasi. Santeti samitakilese khīṇāsave. Kibbisakārīti pāpakāri. Papatanti narakaṃ.
应当知道,这部经属于杂染部分;为了说明贪爱等因为自性差别和阶段差别而有许多种类,所以借助许多经句,以举例的方式展示出来,这就是所说的属于杂染部分的经。巴利
Idaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyanti idaṃ taṇhādīnaṃ sabhāvabhedato avatthābhedato ca anekabhedakaṃ dassetuṃ anekehi suttapadehi udāharaṇavasena dassitaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttanti veditabbaṃ.
对于有信心的人,是指对业、业果等生起信仰的人。巴利
Pasannenāti kammakammaphalādīni saddahantena.
繁荣,是指用手饰、头饰等各种装饰品以及宝珠、黄金等物装点得富丽堂皇。富庶,是指油、蜜、糖浆之类以及财富、谷物之类丰足充裕。人群拥挤,是指人连续不断。狭窄曲折的街巷,所谓“byūhā”,是指那些没有贯通出口的巷道,走进去只能从原路出来,这种狭窄而密集的布局就叫作狭窄曲折的街巷。这也说明那座城市里居处十分稠密。迷惑的,是指还没有得到调伏,或者在这里那里四处游荡。无罪的,是指不卑劣、没有过失。以不动摇的净信,是指坚固不可动摇的净信,也就是由通达真谛而生起的净信。巴利
Iddhanti hatthūpagasīsūpagādialaṅkārehi maṇikanakādīhi ca samiddhaṃ. Phītanti telamadhuphāṇitādīhi ca dhanadhaññādīhi ca vipulaṃ. Ākiṇṇamanussanti nirantaramanussaṃ. Sambādhabyūhanti byūhā vuccanti anibbiddharacchāyo. Yesu paviṭṭhamaggeneva niggacchanti, te sambādhā byūhakā etthāti sambādhabyūhaṃ. Imināpi tassa nagarassa ghanavāsameva dīpeti. Bhantenāti damathaṃ anupagatena, ito cito ca paribbhamantena vā. Apāpakanti alāmakaṃ. Aveccappasādenāti acalappasādena, saccappaṭivedhato āgatena pasādena.
“死后得到”的意思是:一个人如果不用棍棒伤害众生,那么他死后,若生为人,就得到人间的快乐;若生为天人,就得到天界的快乐;若超越了这两种状态,就得到涅槃的快乐。巴利
Peccaso labhateti yo bhūte daṇḍena na hiṃsati, so puggalo paraloke manussabhūto manussasukhaṃ devabhūto dibbasukhaṃ ubhayaṃ atikkanto nibbānasukhaṃ labhatīti attho.
“将要出发游行”意思是,他要去各地游行。那么,世尊为什么要在各地游行呢?诸佛世尊在各地游行,有七个原因:为了调伏前往其他地方的应受调伏者;为了让已经安住在那里的人发起精勤;为了让修行者避免长期固定住在一个地方;为了显示自己在那里也没有执著;因为那是正觉者住过的地方,所以要让那些地方成为值得建塔供奉的圣地;为了让众多众生通过见佛、亲近佛等行为,生出广大的福德之流;也是为了止息不下雨等灾难。应当知道,诸佛世尊就是由于这七个原因而在各地游行的。巴利
Cārikaṃ pakkamissatīti janapadacārikaṃ gamissati. Kasmā pana bhagavā janapadacārikaṃ caratīti? Sattahi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto janapadacārikaṃ caranti – desantaragatānaṃ veneyyānaṃ vinayanattaṃ, tatra ṭhitānaṃ ussukkasamuppādanaṃ, bhāvakānaṃ ekasmiṃ ṭhāne nibaddhavāsapariharaṇaṃ attano ca tattha anāsaṅgadassanaṃ, sambuddhavasitaṭṭhānatāya desānaṃ cetiyabhāvasampādanaṃ, bahūnaṃ sattānaṃ dassanūpasaṅkamanādīhi puññoghappasavanaṃ, avuṭṭhiādiupaddavūpasamanañcāti imehi sattahi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto janapadacārikaṃ carantīti veditabbaṃ.
“伊西达塔与普拉那”是指伊西达塔和普拉那两人,其中伊西达塔是一来者,普拉那是入流者。在沙计多——那是他们自己出产财富的村子,因“沙计多”而得名。他们在路上安排了一个人:据说,世尊行走的道路正好经过他们村子的村口,所以他们想:“如果世尊趁我们睡着或放逸的时候经过,我们就见不到了。”于是便在路中间安排了一个人。他们跟随:并不是远远地跟着,而是紧跟在后面。因为世尊在车道的中间沿着步行的小路走,另外两人则在道路两旁跟着走。离开道路:诸佛与人同行时会和人寒暄交谈,与人站着时会和人交谈,与人一起坐下时也会花上白天一段时间和人交谈。所以世尊心想:“这两人在我的教法中是可爱的人,已经证得果位,我就和他们一起坐下,花一段时间来接待他们吧。”于是离开道路,走向某一棵树下。在铺好的座位上坐下——据说,他们让人带上伞、鞋、剪裁用的刀、手杖、涂脚油,以及八种饮料和兽皮坐具等前来,然后铺好坐具,献给世尊。导师便在那里坐下。坐在一边:他们说了“把伞、鞋等物给僧团”,然后礼敬世尊,坐在一边。巴利
Isidattapurāṇāti isidatto ca purāṇo ca, tesu isidatto sakadāgāmī. Purāṇo sotāpanno. Sāketeti ‘‘sāketo’’ti laddhanāme attano bhogagāmake. Magge purisaṃ ṭhapesunti tesaṃ kira gāmadvārena bhagavato gamanamaggo, tasmā ‘‘sace bhagavā amhākaṃ suttānaṃ vā pamattānaṃ vā gaccheyya, atha passituṃ na labheyyāmā’’ti maggamajjhe purisaṃ ṭhapesuṃ. Anubandhiṃsūti na dūratova, piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhiṃsu. Bhagavā hi sakaṭamaggassa majjhe jaṅghamaggena agamāsi, itare ubhosu passesu anugacchantā agamaṃsu. Maggā okkammāti buddhā hi kenaci saddhiṃ gacchantāva paṭisanthāraṃ karonti kenaci saddhiṃ ṭhitā kenaci saddhiṃ divasabhāgampi nisinnā, tasmā bhagavā cintesi – ‘‘ime mayhaṃ sāsane vallabhā āgataphalā, imehi saddhiṃ nisīditvā divasabhāgaṃ paṭisanthāraṃ karissāmī’’ti. Maggato okkamitvā yenaññataraṃ rukkhamūlaṃ tenupasaṅkami. Paññatte āsane nisīdīti te kira chattupāhanakattaradaṇḍapādabbhañjanatelāni ceva aṭṭhavidhañca pānakaṃ sarabhapādapallaṅkañca gāhāpetvā āgamaṃsu. Atha naṃ pallaṅkaṃ paññapetvā adaṃsu. Satthā tattha nisīdi. Ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsūti ‘‘chattupāhanādīni bhikkhusaṅghassa dethā’’ti vatvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsu.
“将在舍卫城和憍萨罗地区开始游行”等这一整段,都是按照中央地区的情形来说的。为什么?因为这是固定的惯例。世尊游行的范围确实就在中央地区。即使他去了边地,也一定是在中央地区天亮,这是固定的惯例,所以完全按照中央地区的情形来说。“在迦尸人当中”,就是从迦尸国来说。“同样,在摩揭陀人当中”,就是从摩揭陀国来说。在“世尊将要来到我们附近”这句话里,他们感到欢喜,不仅仅是因为距离近,而是因为想到:“现在我们可以布施了,可以用香、花等来供养了,可以听法了,可以提问了。”他们因此感到欢喜。巴利
Sāvatthiyākosalesu cārikaṃ pakkamissatītiādi sabbaṃ majjhimadesavaseneva vuttaṃ. Kasmā? Niyatāciṇṇattā. Bhagavato hi cārikacaraṇaṃ majjhimadeseyeva. Sacepi paccantadese gacchati, majjhimadeseyeva aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpetīti niyatāciṇṇaṃ, tasmā majjhimadesavaseneva vuttaṃ. Kāsīsūti kāsiraṭṭhato. Tathā magadhesūti magadharaṭṭhato. Āsanne no bhagavā bhavissatīti ettha na kevalaṃ āsannattā eva tesaṃ somanassaṃ hoti, atha kho ‘‘idāni dānaṃ dātuṃ gandhamālādipūjaṃ kātuṃ dhammaṃ sotuṃ pañhaṃ pucchituṃ labhissāmā’’ti nesaṃ somanassaṃ hoti.
所以,木匠们,正因如此,“居家生活是狭窄的”。木匠们,因为当我在远处时,你们会产生不少忧愁,当我在近处时,又会产生不少喜悦,所以你们也应该明白:“居家生活是狭窄的。”正是由于居家生活的过患,你们才会这样。但如果你们舍弃居家生活而出家,那么无论你们跟我同行还是前来,那种情形就不会有了。世尊为了阐明这个道理,才这样说。在这里,“狭窄”应当从“有牵挂、有障碍”这个意义来理解。因为即使住在宽敞的大宅里,由于有牵挂、有障碍,居家生活仍然是狭窄的。“尘垢之路”,是指贪欲等尘垢进来的路,也就是这些尘垢产生的地方。“出家则是空旷的”,是说出家由于“无牵挂、无障碍”,所以是空旷的。要知道,即使在一个只有四肘见方的小房间里,两位比丘结跏趺坐,膝盖碰着膝盖,但基于“无牵挂、无障碍”的意义,这种出家生活也叫作空旷。“而且,木匠们,这对你们来说足以精勤不放逸了。”意思是说,像这样住在狭窄的居家生活中,你们只应当努力不放逸。巴利
Tasmātiha thapatayo sambādho gharāvāsoti thapatayo yasmā tumhākaṃ mayi dūrībhūte anappakaṃ domanassaṃ āsanne anappakaṃ somanassaṃ hoti, tasmāpi veditabbametaṃ ‘‘sambādho gharāvāso’’ti. Gharāvāsassa hi dosena tumhākaṃ evaṃ hoti. Sace pana gharāvāsaṃ pahāya pabbajitā assatha, evaṃ vo mayā saddhiṃyeva gacchantānañca āgacchantānañca taṃ na bhaveyyāti imamatthaṃ dīpento evamāha. Tattha sakiñcanasapalibodhaṭṭhena sambādhatā veditabbā. Mahāghare vasantassāpi hi sakiñcanasapalibodhaṭṭhena gharāvāso sambādhova. Rajopathoti rāgādirajānaṃ āgamanapatho, āgamanaṭṭhānanti attho. Abbhokāso pabbajjāti pabbajjā pana akiñcanaapalibodhaṭṭhena abbhokāso. Caturatanikepi hi gabbhe dvinnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pallaṅkena pallaṅkaṃ ghaṭṭetvā nisinnānampi akiñcanāpalibodhaṭṭhena pabbajjā abbhokāso nāma hoti. Alañca pana vo thapatayo appamādāyāti evaṃ sambādhagharāvāse vasantānaṃ tumhākaṃ appamādameva kātuṃ yuttanti attho.
“象”就是大象。“适合骑乘的”是指适合国王骑乘的坐骑。他们说“让一个坐在前面,一个坐在后面”,据说那两个人全身佩戴好一切装饰,把那两个女人这样安置在两头象上,再把国王的象放在中间,从两边走,所以他们才这样说。“象也要好好守护”,意思是不要让它做出任何特别的举动,要这样守护它。“那些姊妹也要好好守护”,意思是不要她们放逸,要这样守护她们。“自己也要好好守护”,意思是不要做出轻率的言语、随意摇摆身体等行为,要这样守护自己。因为做出这些行为的人,就会被指责为“这个人是背叛主人的”,要这样制止他。巴利
Nāgāti hatthino. Opavayhāti rañño ārohanayoggā. Ekaṃ purato ekaṃ pacchato nisīdāpemāti te kira dvepi janā sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitā dvīsu nāgesu tā itthiyo evaṃ nisīdāpetvā rañño nāgaṃ majjhe katvā ubhosu passesu gacchanti, tasmā evamāhaṃsu. Nāgopi rakkhitabboti yathā kiñci visesitaṃ na karoti, evaṃ rakkhitabbo hoti. Tāpi bhaginiyoti yathā pamādaṃ nāpajjanti, evaṃ rakkhitabbā honti. Attāpīti sitakathitavikkhepitādīni akarontehi attāpi rakkhitabbo hoti . Evaṃ karonto hi ‘‘sāmidubbhako eso’’ti niggahetabbo hoti.
所以在这里,匠师们啊,因为国王总是让你们保管王家的财物,因此居家生活也是狭窄的,是尘垢之道。然而,没有人会让穿粪扫衣的比丘这样保管财物,因此出家才是开阔的。这个道理在一切情况下都一样。而且,匠师们啊,这已经足以让你们不放逸了——他这是在开示:你们应当只修不放逸。巴利
Tasmātiha thapatayoti yasmā tumhe rājā niccaṃ rājabhaṇḍaṃ paṭicchāpeti, tasmāpi sambādho gharāvāso rajopatho. Yasmā pana paṃsukūlikaṃ bhikkhuṃ evaṃ paṭicchāpento natthi, tasmā abbhokāso pabbajjā, evaṃ sabbatthāpi. Alañca kho thapatayo appamādāya, appamādameva karothāti dasseti.
彻底舍弃,就是完全放下的施舍。洗净双手,是指为了前来求施的人而把手洗干净。乐于舍弃,是指喜欢被称为舍离的放下。与乞求相应,是指与应当被乞求这件事相应。也有写成“与祭祀相应”的版本,意思是与布施相应。乐于布施与分享:这是说,即使只得到一点点东西,也乐于从中分给别人。不作划分,是指不会这样分:“这份是我们的,那份是尊长们的”,而是一切都处于应当布施出去的状态。居士们,具足这四种法的圣弟子就是入流者;意思是,入流者就是具足这些法的人。由此说明,入流者一定能得到这四种法。巴利
Muttacāgoti vissaṭṭhacāgo. Payatapāṇīti āgatāgatānaṃ dānatthāya dhotahattho. Vosaggaratoti vosaggasaṅkhāte cāge rato. Yācayogoti yācitabbayutto. ‘‘Yājayogo’’tipi pāṭho, dānayuttoti attho. Dānasaṃvibhāgaratoti etena appamattakampi kiñci labhitvā tatopi saṃvibhāge rato. Appaṭivibhattanti ‘‘idaṃ amhākaṃ bhavissati, idaṃ ayyāna’’nti evaṃ akatavibhāgaṃ, sabbaṃ dātabbameva hutvā ṭhitanti attho. Imehi kho thapatayo catūhi dhammehi samannāgato ariyasāvako sotāpanno hotīti sotāpanno imehi dhammehi samannāgato hotīti attho. Etena sotāpannena imesaṃ catunnaṃ dhammānaṃ ekantato labbhamānataṃ dasseti.
就这样,先用间接的方式说明那些居士具备这四种法,现在为了直接说明这一点,便说出了“你们这些居士……”等话。巴利
Evaṃ tesaṃ thapatīnaṃ imehi catūhi dhammehi samannāgataṃ pariyāyena dassetvā idāni nippariyāyena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tumhe kho thapatayo’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
一千劫,意思是曾有一千个有身。也有写成“八十劫”的版本,意思是曾有八十寿劫。那么,那些有身是在哪里呢?回答说“在天界和人界”,意思就是在天界和人界中。“Saṃviruḷhamhi”指因四面八方都抽芽而茂盛。“Alabhiṃhaṃ”意思是我未获得。“Ajja tiṃsaṃ tato kappā”指从那个劫以来,到今天正好是第三十劫。“Tassā saññāya vāsanā”指由于那佛随念之想的熏习余势。巴利
Sahassaṃ kappakoṭiyoti sahassaṃ attabhāvā ahesunti attho. ‘‘Asīti kappakoṭiyo’’tipi pāṭho, asītiāyukappakoṭiyo ahesunti attho. Kattha pana te ahesunti? Āha ‘‘deve ceva manusse cā’’ti, devesu ceva manussesu cāti attho. Saṃviruḷhamhīti samantato pallavaggahaṇena viruḷhe. Alabhiṃhanti alabhiṃ ahaṃ. Ajja tiṃsaṃ tato kappāti tato kappato ajja sampati ayaṃ kappo tiṃsatimo. Tassā saññāya vāsanāti tassa buddhagatāya saññāya vāsanato.
「Taṇhānighātaka」指彻底断除渴爱的人。「Vaṭaṃsaka」指用花做成的耳饰。「Sabbapupphehilaṅkata」指用各种花装饰。「Lapanantarā」指上下唇之间。「Okkā」指光明。「Muddhanantaradhāyathā」指在头顶上消失。「Kaṅkhaṃ vitarā」指消除疑惑。「Yassa taṃ sabbadhammesu, sadā ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti」中的「ti」只是语助词(nipātamattaṃ)。对于此人,由于对一切法的欲求与系缚,智常相续生起。具一切智者世尊对长老阿难说了此语,这是上下文关联。「Rājā raṭṭhe bhavissatī」指在一切国土中将有国王。「Carima」指最后一生。「Sacchikatvā」指亲身证知后证得。「Dhamma」指四圣谛法,或辟支菩提。巴利
Taṇhānighātakoti taṇhāya samucchedako. Vaṭaṃsakoti pupphamayakaṇṇiko. Sabbapupphehilaṅkatoti nānāpupphehi alaṅkato. Lapanantarāti uttarādharoṭṭhānaṃ antarato. Okkāti pabhā. Muddhanantaradhāyathāti muddhani antaradhāyatha. Kaṅkhaṃ vitarāti vimatiṃ vinodehi. Yassa taṃ sabbadhammesu, sadā ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti tanti nipātamattaṃ. Yassa sabbadhammesu ākaṅkhappaṭibaddhattā sadā ñāṇaṃ pavattati. So sabbaññū bhagavā theraṃ ānandaṃ etadabravīti sambandho. Rājā raṭṭhe bhavissatīti sabbasmiṃ raṭṭhe rājā bhavissati. Carimanti carimabhavaṃ. Sacchikatvāti paccakkhaṃ katvā. Dhammatanti catusaccadhammaṃ, paccekabodhiṃ vā.
“以金覆盖的船”是指一艘两侧都用黄金装饰严严实实地覆盖起来的金船。他就像被问到问题那样作了回答。“我听闻这是对帝释说的”——正如那位天神被问到后回答帝释那样,我也如此听闻——具寿大目犍连把自己所听到的,就这样对世尊说了出来。巴利
Suvaṇṇacchadanaṃ nāvanti ubhosu passesu suvaṇṇālaṅkārehi paṭimaṇḍitavasena chāditaṃ suvaṇṇanāvaṃ. Pañhaṃ puṭṭhā viyākāsi, sakkassa iti me sutanti yathā sā devatā pañhaṃ puṭṭhā sakkassa byākāsi, evaṃ mayāpi sutanti āyasmā mahāmoggallāno attanā yathāsutaṃ taṃ bhagavato vadati.
所谓“尘土塔”,就是把舍利放在里面、再用泥土堆成的塔。这样,它们便名为以世尊为对象而建者,所以经文说“uddissakatesu dasabaladharānaṃ”,意思是在那些为十力者(诸佛陀)而建的纪念物那里。巴利
Paṃsuthūpesūti sarīradhātuṃ abbhantare ṭhapetvā paṃsūhi katathūpesu. Evañhi te bhagavantaṃ uddissakatā nāma honti, tenevāha – ‘‘uddissakatesu dasabaladharāna’’nti.
天子的身体和容貌,是指具有与天子身体相似的容色。Subhagasaṇṭhiti 是指具备美好吉祥的形态。Uḷāraṃ vata taṃ āsi 的意思是:我所做的那份福德,确实非常广大殊胜。Yāhaṃ 就是“那个我”。Satasahassaṃ kappe, mudito thūpaṃ apūjesi 的意思是:供养佛塔之后,我在十万劫中一直满怀喜悦。Anāgantuna vinipātaṃ 是指不再堕入恶趣。Yaṃ cakkhuṃ 是指那智慧之眼。Paṇihitaṃ 是指已安立。Vimuttacittamhi 是指我的心已解脱。Vidhūtalato 是指已抖落渴爱的藤蔓,也就是断尽了渴爱。巴利
Devaputtasarīravaṇṇāti devaputtasarīrasadisavaṇṇā. Subhagasaṇṭhitīti sobhaggayuttasaṇṭhānā. Uḷāraṃ vata taṃ āsīti taṃ mayā kataṃ puññaṃ uḷāraṃ vata ahosi. Yāhanti yā ahaṃ. Satasahassaṃ kappe, mudito thūpaṃ apūjesīti thūpaṃ pūjetvā satasahassaṃ āyukappe ahaṃ muditoti attho. Anāgantuna vinipātanti apāyupapattiṃ anupagantvā. Yaṃ cakkhunti yaṃ paññācakkhuṃ. Paṇihitanti ṭhapitaṃ. Vimuttacittamhīti vimuttacitto amhi. Vidhūtalatoti vidhūtataṇhālato, samucchinnataṇhoti attho.
“Sāmākapatthodanamattaṃ”是指一升稗子煮成的饭那么多。“Akhile”是指因为断除了五种心荒芜,所以心没有滞碍。“Tasmiñca okappayi dhammamuttamaṃ”是说对那位独觉佛、对无上法——辟支菩提生起了净信,确信“此人必定具有无上之法”。“Tasmiñca dhamme paṇidhesiṃ mānasaṃ”是说我也发愿:愿我能亲自证得他所证得的法。“Bhave kudāsupi ca mā apekkhavā”则是说无论何时、投生于何处,都绝不会有期盼之心;这也是心的誓愿,是上下文的关联。巴利
Sāmākapatthodanamattanti sāmākatiṇānaṃ nāḷikodanamattaṃ. Akhileti pañcannaṃ cetokhilānaṃ abhāvena akhile. Tasmiñca okappayi dhammamuttamanti tasmiṃ paccekabuddhe uttamadhammaṃ paccekabodhiṃ ‘‘uttamadhammena nāma imasmiṃ bhavitabba’’nti saddahiṃ. ‘‘Tasmiñca dhamme paṇidhesiṃ mānasa’’nti iminā paṭiladdhadhammaṃ ahampi sacchikareyyanti cittaṃ paṇidahiṃ. Bhave kudāsupi ca mā apekkhavāti katthaci bhave apekkhavā mā bhaveyyanti ca paṇidhesiṃ mānasanti sambandho.
在俱卢国,也就是北俱卢洲。说“长寿者”,是因为他们寿命长达千年。说“无我所执者”,是指没有占有执著的人。说“众生”,是指有情。说“所得不退失者”,是指他们依所获得的福报,直到寿命尽头都不衰退。说“投生三十三天”,意思是成为三十三天众而投生,或者投生在三十三天的天界里。说“投生殊胜之身”,是指投生到殊胜的身体中,也就是种种不同颜色的天身。说“眷属众多者”,是指身边有众多随从的人。说“超越善与不善”,是指超越善与不善法的人。说“现前”,意思是“这确实是现前之语”。巴利
Kurūsūti uttarakurūsu. Dīghāyukesūti tesaṃ vassasahassāyukatāya vuttaṃ. Amamesūti apariggahesu. Pāṇīsūti sattesu. Ahīnagāmīsūti yathāladdhasampattīhi yāvatāyukaṃ aparihīnasabhāvesu . Tidasopapajjathāti tāvatiṃso hutvā upapajjiṃ, tidase vā tāvatiṃsabhavane upapajjiṃ. Visiṭṭhakāyūpagatoti visiṭṭhakāyesu nānāvaṇṇakāyesu upagato. Yasassisūti parivāravantesu. Hitāhitāsihīti kusalākusale vītivattīhi. Paccakkhaṃ khvimanti paccakkhaṃ kho imaṃ vacananti adhippāyo.
Sakāsi 的意思是“他做了”。Balimābhihārī 的意思是“他献上了供养的供品”。Patitassa ekaṃ 的意思是“从他手中掉落了一朵花”。巴利
Sakāsīti so akāsi. Balimābhihārīti pūjābaliṃ abhihari. Patitassa ekanti tassa hatthato ekapupphaṃ patitaṃ.
“Upariṭṭha”是指在上面虚空中站立的。“Ariṭṭha”是指一位名叫阿利咤的独觉佛。“内与外”是指内境和外境。“曾为我所知”是指那些过去曾为我所知的。“生死的轮回,现在不再有后有”:意思是,那种反复生生死死的轮回,也叫作后有,如今它已经不存在了。巴利
Upariṭṭhanti upari vehāse ṭhitaṃ. Ariṭṭhanti ariṭṭhaṃ nāma paccekasambuddhaṃ. Ajjhattañca bahiddhā cāti ajjhattavisayā ca bahiddhavisayā ca. Ye me vijjiṃsūti ye me pubbe vijjamānā ahesuṃ. Jātimaraṇasaṃsāro, natthi dāni punabbhavoti punappunaṃ jāyanamīyanabhūto saṃsāro punabbhavoti ca vuccati, so ca dāni natthīti attho.
这部《习气分经》,应当理解为:它是通过举例的方式,来展示各种说明习气分福德的经文语句,所以叫做《习气分经》。巴利
Idaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttanti idaṃ vāsanābhāgapuññavibhāvanānaṃ nānāsuttapadānaṃ udāharaṇavasena dassitaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttanti veditabbaṃ.
“上方、下方……乃至不再有后有”,这一段被称为“通达分经”,因为圣道有度越暴流的作用。不应作思,意思是说:不应生起心念。法性,就是诸法的自性。巴利
‘‘Uddhaṃ adho…pe… apunabbhavāyā’’ti idaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttanti vuttaṃ oghataraṇassa ariyamaggakiccattā. Na cetanā karaṇīyāti na cittaṃ uppādetabbaṃ. Dhammatāti dhammasabhāvo.
当“确实”一词出现时,指的是某个时候。“显现”就是生起。“诸法”是指能成就顺缘起证悟的菩提分法。或者,“显现”是说明、开示的意思,是依现观而变得明显。“诸法”是指四圣谛法。“热忱”称为精进,因为它以烧尽烦恼为本质。“具热忱者”就是具备正勤精进的人。“禅那者”是指以所缘审察禅那和特相审察禅那而修禅的人。“婆罗门”是指已舍断罪恶的漏尽者。那时,他的一切疑惑都消散:对于这样显现此法的人,依照“尊者,是谁在触?世尊说:‘这个问题不适当’”这类方式,以及“尊者,什么是老死?这是谁的老死?世尊说:‘这个问题不适当’”这类方式所说的缘起疑惑;还有因为未通达缘起本身而说的“我过去世存在吗”等十六种疑惑,以及“对佛有疑、对法有疑”等八种疑惑——所有这些疑惑都消散、离去、灭尽。为什么?因为他了知有因之法:他以无明等为因,了知、遍知、通达这整个有因的诸行等纯大苦蕴之法。巴利
Yadā haveti yasmiṃ have kāle. Pātubhavantīti uppajjanti. Dhammāti anulomapaccayākārapaṭivedhasādhakā bodhipakkhiyadhammā. Pātubhavantīti vā pakāsenti, abhisamayavasena pākaṭā honti. Dhammāti catuariyasaccadhammā. Ātāpo vuccati kilesasantāpanaṭṭhena vīriyaṃ. Ātāpinoti sammappadhānavīriyavato. Jhāyatoti ārammaṇūpanijjhānalakkhaṇena lakkhaṇūpanijjhānalakkhaṇena ca jhānena jhāyantassa. Brāhmaṇassāti bāhitapāpassa khīṇāsavassa. Athassa kaṅkhā vapayanti sabbāti athassa evaṃ pātubhūtadhammassa yā tā ‘‘ko nu kho, bhante, phusatīti? No kallo pañhoti bhagavā avocā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.12) nayena ‘‘katamaṃ nu kho, bhante, jarāmaraṇaṃ, kassa panidaṃ jarāmaraṇanti? No kallo pañhoti bhagavā avocā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.35) ca nayena paccayākārakaṅkhā vuttā. Yā ca paccayākārasseva appaṭividdhattā ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahamatītamaddhāna’’ntiādikā (ma. ni. 1.18; saṃ. ni. 2.20) soḷasakaṅkhā ‘‘buddhe kaṅkhati dhamme kaṅkhatī’’tiādikā (dha. sa. 1008) aṭṭha ca kaṅkhā āgatā, tā sabbā vapayanti apagacchanti nirujjhanti, kasmā? Yato pajānāti sahetudhammaṃ, yasmā avijjādikena hetunā sahetukaṃ imaṃ saṅkhārādiṃ kevalaṃ dukkhakkhandhadhammaṃ pajānāti aññāsi paṭivijjhati.
当他了知诸缘的灭尽,也就是了知、证悟了被称为“诸缘灭尽”的涅槃,因此,当这位具足热忱、修习禅那的婆罗门,如上所述的那些法显现时,那些因为不了知涅槃而可能生起的疑惑,在那一刻全都消散。巴利
Yato khayaṃ paccayānaṃ avedīhi yasmā paccayānaṃ khayasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ avedi aññāsi paṭivijjhi, tasmā yadāssa ātāpino jhāyato brāhmaṇassa vuttappakārā dhammā pātubhavanti. Athassa yā nibbānassa aviditattā kaṅkhā uppajjeyyuṃ, sabbāpi tā kaṅkhā vapayantīti.
住在林野的人,就是林居者。以不为人知的乞食维持生活,是指在各家之间都不被人认识,始终像新来的人一样,靠乞食、挨门托钵来过活。或者也可以说,在那些明确指定、有权势的人家里,为了寻找辛辣的配料和香美的食物而乞讨,这叫“知而乞”;而按顺序挨家站在门口,得到混合在一起的食物,这叫“不为人知的乞食”。这里指的就是后者。以这种方式维持生活。对诸欲无期望,是指对事欲和烦恼欲都不抱期待。巴利
Āraññanti āraññakaṃ. Aññātuñchena yāpentanti kulesu aññāto niccanavoyeva hutvā uñchena piṇḍacariyāya yāpentaṃ. Atha vā abhilakkhitesu issarajanagehesu kaṭukabhaṇḍasambhāraṃ sugandhabhojanaṃ pariyesantassa uñchanaṃ ñātuñchanaṃ nāma, gharapaṭipāṭiyā pana dvāre ṭhitena laddhamissakabhojanaṃ aññātuñchanaṃ nāma. Idaṃ idha adhippetaṃ. Tena yāpentaṃ. Kāmesu anapekkhinanti vatthukāmakilesakāmesu nirapekkhaṃ.
断除,就是杀灭。安乐而卧,是因为不再被愤怒的灼热所烧灼,所以能安乐地睡眠。不忧愁,是因为愤怒已被摧毁、忧悲已经消失,所以不忧愁。毒根,是指会带来苦果的。甘甜之顶,是指被人辱骂就回骂、被人殴打就回击、被人反击就再反击时生起的那种乐受,针对这个才说它是“甘甜之顶”。在这里,最终的部分被称为“顶”。圣者,是指佛陀等。巴利
Chetvāti vadhitvā. Sukhaṃ setīti kodhapariḷāhena aparidayhamānattā sukhaṃ sayati. Na socatīti kodhavināsena vinaṭṭhadomanassattā na socati. Visamūlassāti dukkhavipākassa. Madhuraggassāti yaṃ akkuṭṭhassa paccakkositvā pahaṭassa paṭippaharitvā sukhaṃ uppajjati, taṃ sandhāya so ‘‘madhuraggo’’ti vutto. Imasmiñhi ṭhāne pariyosānaṃ ‘‘agga’’nti vuttaṃ. Ariyāti buddhādayo.
能杀,就是可能杀害。已生起,是指没有被根除、没有被镇伏而生起,或者以正在现行活动的方式生起。应驱除,就是应当把它从自己的相续中遣除。巴利
Haneti haneyya. Uppatitanti asamugghāṭitaṃ avikkhambhituppannavasena samudācāruppannavasena samudācarantaṃ. Vinodayeti attano santānato nīhareyya.
“以刀”这句话是开示的引子,意思是单刃刀之类的刀具。“被击中”就是被打到。击打有四种:站在上方朝下打,叫“上击”;站在下方朝上打,叫“下击”;像门闩针一样刺穿,叫“穿透击”;其余所有打法,都叫“散击”。这里取的是“上击”。因为这种伤最严重,箭镞很难拔出来,治疗也很困难,里面会化脓积血。脓血排不出来,就堵住伤口。想排出脓血,就得把人绑在床上,使其头朝下,他会达至死亡或等同死亡之苦。应安住。巴利
Sattiyāti desanāsīsametaṃ, ekatodhārādinā satthenāti attho. Omaṭṭhoti pahaṭo. Cattāro hi pahārā omaṭṭho ummaṭṭho maṭṭho vimaṭṭhoti. Tattha upari ṭhatvā adhomukhaṃ dinnappahāro omaṭṭho nāma, adho ṭhatvā uddhaṃ mukhaṃ dinnappahāro ummaṭṭho nāma, aggaḷasūci viya vinivijjhitvā kato maṭṭho nāma, seso sabbopi vimaṭṭho nāma. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne omaṭṭho gahito. So hi sabbadāruṇo duruddharaṇasallo duttikiccho antodoso antopubbalohito ca hoti. Pubbalohitaṃ anikkhamitvā vaṇamukhaṃ pariyonandhitvā tiṭṭhati. Pubbalohitaṃ nīharitukāmehi mañcena saddhiṃ bandhitvā adhosiro kātabbo hoti, maraṇaṃ vā maraṇamattaṃ vā dukkhaṃ pāpuṇāti. Paribbajeti vihareyya.
这段偈颂说明了什么?就像一个人被矛刺中,为了拔矛、治伤等目的而发起精进、付出努力、奋力行动;又像一个人的头被火烧着、头顶正在燃烧,为了扑灭头上的火而发起精进、付出努力、奋力行动。同样地,比丘为了断除欲贪,应当具念、不放逸地安住——世尊这样教导。巴利
Imāya gāthāya kiṃ kathitaṃ? Yathā sattiyā omaṭṭhapuriso sallubbāhanavaṇatikicchanānaṃ atthāya vīriyaṃ ārabhati payogaṃ karoti parakkamati. Yathā ca dayhamāne matthake ādittasiro tassa nibbāpanatthāya vīriyaṃ ārabhati payogaṃ karoti parakkamati, evamevaṃ bhikkhu kāmarāgappahānāya sato appamatto hutvā vihareyya bhagavāti kathesi.
天神这样说完后,世尊心里想:“这位天神把譬喻举得很扎实,但抓住的义理却很有限。就算她一再地说,也只会说到欲贪的镇伏断除而已;只要欲贪还没有被圣道彻底根除,它就一直紧跟着不放。”于是,世尊就拿同一个譬喻,按初果圣道的方式把天神的方向扭转过来,为她开示,说出第二首偈颂:“就像被利剑刺中一样。”其中的含义,应当依照前面所说的理路来理解。巴利
Evaṃ devatāya kathite atha bhagavā cintesi – ‘‘imāya devatāya upamā daḷhaṃ katvā ānītā, atthaṃ pana parittakaṃ gahetvā ṭhitā. Punappunaṃ kathentīpi hi esā kāmarāgassa vikkhambhanappahānameva katheyya, yāva ca kāmarāgo maggena na samugghāṭiyyati, tāva anubandhova hotī’’ti tameva upamaṃ gahetvā paṭhamamaggavasena devatāya vinivaṭṭetvā dassento ‘‘sattiyā viya omaṭṭho’’ti dutiyagāthamāha. Tassattho purimanayānusārena veditabbo.
“世间味”是指欲乐。“期望寂静”是指心向一切行寂灭的涅槃。“有慧”是指有智慧的人。“心已向”是指心已导向涅槃。“已离欲想”是指以与第四道相应的正断离,从一切种类的欲想中彻底远离。也有“已离欲”的读法。而“于欲想”是处格。在《有偈品》中有“于诸欲想中”的读法。因为通过四道已经超越了十种结,所以是“超越一切结者”。或者,仅凭第四道就已超越五上分结,由于对种种处的欢喜——即称为“喜”的渴爱已被灭尽,且三有的“有”也已尽,所以是“喜有已尽者”。这样的漏尽比丘,不会沉没在甚深的轮回大海中。巴利
Lokāmisanti kāmaguṇo. Santipekkhoti sabbasaṅkhārūpasamaṃ nibbānaṃ apekkhamāno. Paññavāti paññavanto. Pahitattoti nibbānaṃ patipesitacitto. Virato kāmasaññāyāti yāya kāyaci sabbato kāmasaññāya catutthamaggasampayuttāya samucchedaviratiyā virato. ‘‘Viratto’’tipi pāṭho. Kāmasaññāyāti pana bhummavacanaṃ hoti. Sagāthāvagge (saṃ. ni. 1.96) ‘‘kāmasaññāsū’’ti pāṭho. Catūhi maggehi dasannampi saṃyojanānaṃ atītattā sabbasaṃyojanātīto. Catutthamaggeneva vā uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanātīto tatra tatrābhinandanato nandisaṅkhātāya taṇhāya tiṇṇañca bhavānaṃ parikkhīṇattā nandibhavaparikkhīṇo. So tādiso khīṇāsavo bhikkhu gambhīre saṃsāraṇṇave na sīdati.
所谓“信”,是指有些人通过前阶段的身善行等各类法,以及后阶段的三十七菩提分法,证得了涅槃,成为阿罗汉、独觉佛或佛陀的声闻弟子。他信受这些阿罗汉所证的法,为了证得涅槃而获得世间与出世间的智慧——但这并不是单凭信仰就能做到的。因为由信而心生,就会去亲近;亲近就会侍奉;侍奉就会倾耳;倾耳就会闻法。所以,从亲近开始,一直到闻法,通过听闻学习,便获得了智慧。巴利
Saddahānoti yena pubbabhāge kāyasucaritādibhedena, aparabhāge ca sattattiṃsabodhipakkhiyabhedena dhammena arahanto buddhapaccekabuddhabuddhasāvakā nibbānaṃ pattā. Taṃ saddahāno arahataṃ dhammaṃ nibbānappattiyā lokiyalokuttarapaññaṃ labhati, tañca kho na saddhāmattakeneva. Yasmā pana saddhājāto upasaṅkamati, upasaṅkamanto payirupāsati, payirupāsanto sotaṃ odahati, odahitasoto dhammaṃ suṇāti, tasmā upasaṅkamanato paṭṭhāya yāva dhammassavanena sussūsaṃ labhate paññaṃ.
这段话要说明的是什么?即使已经信受了这个法,也还是要按时去亲近老师和戒师,通过履行自己的义务来侍奉他们。当老师因为受到侍奉而心生欢喜,想要说些什么的时候,他们就有了想听闻的意愿,于是倾耳聆听。这样听着,就能有所获得。同样,对于想听闻佛法这件事,由于不放逸而使正念不丢失,能够辨别说得好与说得不好,只有明智的人才能获得,不是其他人能获得的。因此说:“不放逸的明智者。”巴利
Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Taṃ dhammaṃ saddahitvāpi ācariyupajjhāye kālena kālaṃ upasaṅkamitvāpi vattakaraṇena payirupāsitvā yadā payirupāsanāya ārādhitacittā kiñci vattukāmā honti. Atha adhigatāya sotukāmatāya sotaṃ odahitvā suṇanto labhatīti evaṃ sussūsampi ca satiavippavāsena appamatto subhāsitadubbhāsitaññutāya vicakkhaṇo eva labhati, na itaro. Tenāha – ‘‘appamatto vicakkhaṇo’’ti.
“行适宜者”:指不错失时机、地点等,对世间法和出世间法,都去做与证得相应的事,所以叫“行适宜者”。“担当者”:指以心所层面的精进力,不放下责任。“奋起者”:指以身层面的精进力,具足奋起,毫不松懈。“获得财富”:指证得世间与出世间的财富。“以真实”:指言语上的真实和胜义上的真实。佛陀、独觉佛、圣弟子在证得涅槃时,也同时获得了称誉。“施予”他人任何想要、所求之物,就是在结交朋友、促成关系、建立情谊。或者,能布施难以布施之物,就是在结交朋友;应当知道,通过布施这一途径,也摄受了四种摄事。凭借这些,他们结交朋友。“从此世到他世,他命终之后确实不忧愁”:意思是,某人具有这些信等法,从此世死后往生他世,不会忧愁,因为他没有忧愁的因由。巴利
Patirūpakārīti desakālādīni ahāpetvā lokiyassa lokuttarassa dhammassa patirūpaṃ adhigamūpāyaṃ karotīti patirūpakārī. Dhuravāti cetasikavīriyavasena anikkhittadhuro. Uṭṭhātāti kāyikavīriyavasena uṭṭhānasampanno asithilaparakkamo. Vindate dhananti lokiyalokuttaradhanaṃ adhigacchati. Saccenāti vacīsaccena paramatthasaccena ca. Buddhapaccekabuddhaariyasāvakā nibbutiṃ pāpuṇantā kittimpi pāpuṇantiyeva. Dadanti paresaṃ yaṃ kiñci icchitaṃ patthitaṃ dento mittāni ganthati sampādeti karotīti attho. Duddadaṃ vā dadanto ganthati, dānamukhena cattāripi saṅgahavatthūni gahitānīti veditabbāni. Tehi mittāni karonti. Asmā lokā paraṃ lokaṃ, sa ve pecca na socatīti yassa puggalassa ime saddhādayo dhammā vijjanti, so imasmā lokā paraṃ lokaṃ gantvā na socati, sokakāraṇaṃ tassa natthīti attho.
有信仰的在家求道者,如果具备这四种法——
具足真实、法、坚忍与舍弃的人,他死后确实不会忧愁。巴利
‘‘Yassete caturo dhammā, saddhassa gharamesino; Saccaṃ dhammo dhiti cāgo, sa ve pecca na socatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 190) –
把剩下的偈颂省略不引。因为在《旷野经》里,这些偈颂是旷野夜叉问“怎样才能获得慧”等问题时,世尊所说的。巴利
Gāthaṃ avasesaṃ katvā udāhaṭaṃ. Āḷavakasutte hi imā gāthā āḷavakena ‘‘kathaṃ su labhate pañña’’ntiādinā (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 187) puṭṭhena bhagavatā bhāsitāti.
无论以什么方式,就是指无论以什么原因,或者以什么方法。共住,就是指在同一个地方一起居住、相遇。那样的,就是指这样相遇的、应当被悲悯的人。若以清净之心,就是指被悲悯所激发而清净的信心,以这样的心。不因此成为被系缚者,就是指不会因为那样所说的教诫,而被欲贪等结缚所系缚。凡有悲悯、怜愍,就是指为了使人达到圣道而生的悲悯与慈爱,就是这个意思。巴利
Yena kenaci vaṇṇenāti yena kenaci kāraṇena, pakārena vā. Saṃvāsoti ekasmiṃ ṭhāne sahavāso samāgamo. Tanti tathā samāgataṃ anukampitabbaṃ purisaṃ. Manasā ce pasannenāti karuṇāsamussāhitena pasādena pasannena manasā. Na tena hoti saṃyuttoti tena yathāvuttena anusāsanena kāmacchandādīnaṃ saṃyojanavasena saṃyutto nāma na hoti. Yānukampā anuddayāti yā ariyamaggasampāpanavasena karuṇāyanā, mettāyanā cāti attho.
“贪与嗔”这两者,贪和嗔就像前面所说的那样。“从什么因缘而来”,就是以什么为因、以什么为根本原因。这里“从何”一词的语尾变成了“to”,应当知道在复合词中它并没有被省略。“不乐、乐、毛发竖立从何生起”:在偏僻的坐卧处,以及在增上善法中生起的不乐、厌烦;在五种欲乐对象中生起的乐、喜悦、执著、嬉戏等;以及因毛发竖立而生起、被称为毛发竖立的内心惊颤——这三种法,从何而生?从何而起?这是提问。“从何现起”:从何生起之后。“心”:指善心。“思惟”:指欲思惟等。“如幼童放飞乌鸦”:就像幼童在玩耍时,用线绑住乌鸦的脚然后放飞、抛出;同样,那些不善思惟从何现起之后,把善心放飞了呢?这是提问。巴利
Rāgo ca doso cāti rāgadosā heṭṭhā vuttanayāva. Kutonidānāti kiṃnidānā kiṃhetukā. Paccattavacanassa hi ayaṃ to-ādeso, samāse cassa lopābhāvo veditabbo. Aratī ratī lomahaṃso kutojāti yāyaṃ pantesu senāsanesu, adhikusalesu ca dhammesu arati ukkaṇṭhitā, yā ca pañcasu kāmaguṇesu rati abhirati āsatti kīḷanādi, yo ca lomahaṃsasamuṭṭhānato lomahaṃsasaṅkhāto cittutrāso, ime tayo dhammā kuto jātā kuto nibbattāti pucchā. Kuto samuṭṭhāyāti kuto uppajjitvā. Manoti kusalacittaṃ. Vitakkāti kāmavitakkādayo. Kumārakā dhaṅkamivosajantīti yathā kumārakā kīḷantā kākaṃ suttena pāde bandhitvā osajanti khipanti, evaṃ kusalamanaṃ akusalavitakkā kuto samuṭṭhāya osajantīti pucchā.
由贪等语是第二首偈颂的解答。其中,从此一语是就有身而说。因为贪与嗔以有身为因,不乐、喜乐和毛发竖立都是从有身而生。欲寻等正是从有身生起之后,才把善心抛弃。因此,否定其他以本性等为因的说法,而说:以此为因,从此生起。这里词句成立的方式,应如前一首偈颂所说的那样理解。巴利
Rāgocāti dutiyagāthā tassā vissajjanaṃ. Tattha itoti attabhāvaṃ sandhāyāha. Attabhāvanidānā hi rāgadosā, arati rati lomahaṃsā ca attabhāvato jātā. Kāmavitakkādayo attabhāvato eva samuṭṭhāya kusalamanaṃ osajanti. Tena tadaññaṃ pakatiādikāraṇaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha – ‘‘itonidānā ito samuṭṭhāyā’’ti. Purimagāthāya vuttanayenettha saddasiddhi veditabbā.
现在,为了说明前面所说的“以此因缘”等句中“以自身为因、从自身生起、从自身产生”这个意思,而说“由爱染而生,从自身生起”。因为贪等这些法,一直到寻为止,都是由渴爱之爱染而生的。它们生起时,是在名为自身的五取蕴集合体中、在自身当中生起的。因此说“由爱染而生,从自身生起”。现在,为了阐明这个意思,举出譬喻:“如同孟加拉榕的枝干所生”。其中,“枝干所生”是指从枝干上生出的气根。这里要说的是:就像孟加拉榕树那些称为枝干所生的气根,在名为树液的爱染存在时就会生起,生起时也是在那棵孟加拉榕树的各个树枝部位上产生;同样,这些贪等烦恼,在内心有渴爱之爱染时就会生起,生起时也是在那个自身当中的眼等各个部位、在各种可爱的对象上产生。因此说“由爱染而生,从自身生起”。“广泛地缠缚于诸欲”:因为贪也以五种欲乐等方式而有种种差别,嗔也以嗔怒事等方式而有种种差别,不乐等也各自依各自的方式而有差别,所以所有这些烦恼以各种方式变成多种多样之后,依所依、根门、所缘等,在那些各种欲乐上如此这般地缠缚、附着、纠结而住。像什么呢?就像蔓藤在林中蔓延,正如在林中蔓延的蔓藤,在那些树木的枝、杈、梢等各个部分上缠缚、附着、纠结而住;同样,这些烦恼法也是如此。因此在这里,对于种种差别的欲乐事,就是烦恼的缠缚丛。巴利
Idāni yvāyaṃ ‘‘itonidānā’’tiādīsu attabhāvanidānā attabhāvato jātā attabhāvato samuṭṭhāyāti attho vutto, taṃ sādhento āha – ‘‘snehajā attasambhūtā’’ti. Ete hi rāgādayo vitakkapariyosānā taṇhāsnehena jātā. Tathā jāyantā ca pañcupādānakkhandhabhede attabhāvasaṅkhāte attani sambhūtā. Tenāha – ‘‘snehajā attasambhūtā’’ti. Idāni tadatthajotikaṃ upamaṃ dasseti ‘‘nigrodhasseva khandhajā’’ti. Tattha khandhajāti khandhesu jātā pārohā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā nigrodhassa khandhajasaṅkhātā pārohā āporasasaṅkhāte snehe sati jāyanti, jāyantā ca tasmiṃyeva nigrodhe tesu tesu sākhappadesesu sambhavanti, evaṃ ete rāgādayo ajjhattaṃ taṇhāsnehe sati jāyanti, jāyantā ca tasmiṃyeva attabhāve tesu tesu cakkhādippadesesu iṭṭhārammaṇesu sambhavanti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘snehajā attasambhūtā’’ti. Puthu visattā kāmesūti yasmā rāgopi pañcakāmaguṇikādivasena, dosopi āghātavatthuādivasena aratiādayopi tassa tassa bhedassa vasenāti sabbathā sabbepime kilesā puthu anekappakārā hutvā vatthudvārārammaṇādivasena tesu tesu kāmesu tathā tathā visattā laggā saṃsibbitvā ṭhitā. Kimiva? Māluvāva vitatā vane yathā vane vitatā māluvā tesu tesu rukkhasākhappasākhādibhedesu visattā hoti laggā saṃsibbitvā ṭhitā, evaṃ ete kilesā dhammā, tasmā ettha puthupabhedesu vatthukāmesu visattaṃ kilesagahanaṃ.
凡是能了知它从何因生起的人,就能把它驱除。夜叉,请听!这段话的意思是:那些众生了知烦恼的稠林,知道“它从这个因生起”,也就是知道它是在被渴爱之湿润所浸润的有身中生起,于是以观见过患等修行所生的智慧之火,把那渴爱之湿润烧干,从而驱除、舍弃它。夜叉,请听我们这样说!他们渡过了这难渡的瀑流,过去从未渡过,为了不再受生。因为凡是驱除烦恼稠林的人,一定在修习圣道;不修习圣道,就不可能驱除烦恼。这样修习圣道的他们,以平常自然的智慧,渡过了那难渡的四种瀑流——欲瀑流等——为了不再受生、为了涅槃,在这漫长时劫以来连梦中都从未渡过、从未越过的瀑流中渡过了。巴利
Ye naṃ pajānanti yatonidānaṃ, te naṃ vinodenti suṇohi yakkha. Tassattho – ye sattā naṃ kilesagahanaṃ ‘‘itonidānaṃ esa uppajjatī’’ti jānanti, te naṃ taṇhāsinehasinehite attabhāve uppajjatīti ñatvā taṃ taṇhāsinehaṃ ādīnavānupassanādibhāvanāñāṇagginā visosentā vinodenti pajahanti, evaṃ amhākaṃ bhāsitaṃ suṇohi yakkhāti. Te duttaraṃ oghamimaṃ taranti, atiṇṇapubbaṃ apunabbhavāyāti ye hi saṃkilesagahanaṃ vinodenti, te ekantena maggaṃ bhāventi. Na hi maggabhāvanaṃ vinā kilesavinodanaṃ atthi. Evaṃ maggaṃ bhāventā te pakatiñāṇena duttaraṃ kāmoghādiṃ catubbidhaṃ oghaṃ iminā dīghena addhunā supinantenapi atiṇṇapubbaṃ anatikkantapubbaṃ apunabbhavāya nibbānāya taranti.
世尊,难行啊!据说有一位天子,前世曾是修行人,因为烦恼太重,就用相应的对治精进压伏烦恼,修习沙门法,但由于过去善根薄弱,还没证到圣位就命终了,转生到天界。他来到如来面前,讲述这难行之事,这样说道。这里说的“难行”,是指十年……乃至六十年间,始终修习完全清净的沙门法,这才叫难行。“有学”指七有学。“戒等持”指以戒而等持、具足戒。“已住立”指已安住于这种状态。“趣向非家者”,指已趣向无家、无系缚者,即出家者。“知足”,指对四资具的知足。这样回答完所问的问题后,为了引出后面的问题,说了“趣向非家者”等语。巴利
Dukkaraṃ bhagavāti eko kira devaputto pubbayogāvacaro bahalakilesatāya sappayogena kilese vikkhambhento samaṇadhammaṃ katvā pubbahetumandatāya ariyabhūmiṃ appatvāva kālaṃ katvā devaloke nibbatto, so tathāgataṃ upasaṅkamitvā dukkarabhāvaṃ ārocento evamāha. Tattha dukkaranti dasapi vassāni…pe… saṭṭhipi vassāni ekantaparisuddhassa samaṇadhammassa karaṇaṃ nāmetaṃ dukkaraṃ. Sekkhāti satta sekkhā. Sīlasamāhitāti sīlena samāhitā samupetā. Ṭhitattāti patiṭṭhitasabhāvā. Evaṃ pucchitapañhaṃ vissajjitvā uparipañhaṃ samuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ ‘‘anagāriyupetassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha anagāriyupetassāti anagāriyaṃ niggehabhāvaṃ upagatassa, pabbajitassāti attho. Tuṭṭhīti catupaccayasantoso.
关于“修习”:是指修习心的寂止。那些日夜乐于诸根寂止的人,能令难以安定的心得定。那些心得定的人,圆满对四种资具的知足,所以不感到疲惫。那些知足的人,圆满戒,所以不感到疲惫。那些安住于戒的七有学圣者,他们切断死神之网,断除被称为死神之网的烦恼网,然后前行。巴利
Bhāvanāyāti cittavūpasamabhāvanāya. Te chetvā maccuno jālanti ye rattindivaṃ indriyūpasame ratā, te dussamādahaṃ cittaṃ samādahanti. Ye samāhitacittā, te catupaccayasantosaṃ pūrentā na kilamanti. Ye santuṭṭhā, te sīlaṃ pūrentā na kilamanti. Ye sīle patiṭṭhitā satta sekkhā, te ariyā maccuno jālasaṅkhātaṃ kilesajālaṃ chinditvā gacchanti.
“难行”:尊者,确实是这样。那些乐于调伏诸根的人,能让难以安定的心安定下来。那些心得安定的人,在圆满四资具的知足时不会疲惫。那些知足的人,在圆满戒时不会疲惫。那些以戒为最高依止的七有学圣者,则切断被称为死魔之网的烦恼网而前行。他们怎么会不前行呢?然而,这条难行道,他说是“世尊所行之道并不平坦”。其实,圣道本身既不难行,也不平坦,只是它的前行道上有许多危险,所以才这样说。“头向下者”:就是以智慧之头朝下坠落的人。因为无力登上圣道,他们才被说成是从道上坠落。“圣者之道是平等的”:那圣道正是圣者们所行的平等之道。“在不平中平等”:即使在不平坦的众生之中,他们也确实是平等的。巴利
Duggamoti saccametaṃ, bhante, ye indriyūpasame ratā, te dussamādahaṃ cittaṃ samādahanti. Ye samāhitacittā, te catupaccayasantosaṃ pūrentā na kilamanti. Ye santuṭṭhā, te sīlaṃ pūrentā na kilamanti. Ye sīle paramaggāhino satta sekkhā, te ariyā maccuno jālasaṅkhātaṃ kilesajālaṃ chinditvā gacchanti. Kiṃ na gamissanti, ayaṃ pana duggamo ‘‘bhagavāvisamo maggo’’ti āha. Tattha kiñcāpi ariyamaggo neva duggamo na visamo, pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya panassa bahū parissayā honti, tasmā evaṃ vutto. Avaṃsirāti ñāṇasirena adhosirā hutvā papatanti. Ariyamaggaṃ ārohituṃ asamatthatāya eva te magge papatantīti vuccanti. Ariyānaṃ samo maggoti sveva maggo ariyānaṃ samo hoti. Visame samāti visamepi sattakāye samā eva.
“这就是那座祇园”:给孤独天子为了称赞祇园以及佛陀等,特地前来,这样说道。“仙众所依止”:是比丘僧团居住的地方。像这样用第一首偈颂称赞了祇园之后,现在为了称赞圣道,说出“业、明、法、戒、最上活命”等话。其中,“业”指道的思,“明”指道的慧,“法”指定,或者指属于定的那些法。“戒、活命为最上”:意思是说,安立在戒上的人的活命才是最上的。另一种解释:“明”指正见和正思惟,“法”指正精进、正念、正定,“戒”指正语、正业、正命,“活命为最上”是说安立在这戒中的人的活命,才叫最上。“依此,人们得以清净”:依这八支圣道,众生得以清净。巴利
Idañhi taṃ jetavananti anāthapiṇḍiko devaputto jetavanassa ceva buddhādīnañca vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ āgantvā evamāha. Isisaṅghanisevitanti bhikkhusaṅghanivesitaṃ. Evaṃ paṭhamagāthāya jetavanassa vaṇṇaṃ kathetvā idāni ariyamaggassa vaṇṇaṃ kathento ‘‘kammaṃ vijjā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kammanti maggacetanā. Vijjāti maggapaññā. Dhammoti samādhi, samādhipakkhikā vā dhammā. Sīlaṃ jīvitamuttamanti sīle patiṭṭhitassa jīvitañca uttamanti dasseti. Atha vā vijjāti diṭṭhisaṅkappā. Dhammoti vāyāmasatisamādhayo. Sīlanti vācākammantājīvā. Jīvitamuttamanti etasmiṃ sīle patiṭṭhitassa jīvitaṃ nāma uttamanti. ‘‘Etena maccā sujjhantī’’ti etena aṭṭhaṅgikena maggena sattā visujjhanti.
“因此”是说:因为众生是靠圣道才得以清净,不是靠种姓或财富,所以这样说。“应当如理地抉择法”:意思是应当用恰当的方法去抉择菩提分法。“如此就在那里得到清净”:意思是就这样在那条圣道上得到清净。另一种解释是:“应当如理地抉择法”指用恰当的方法抉择圣谛法;“如此就在那里得到清净”指就这样在四圣谛中得到清净。接下来,为了称赞舍利弗长老,说了“唯有舍利弗”等话。其中,“唯有舍利弗”是强调的说法,意思是:以这些智慧等而言,唯有舍利弗最为殊胜。“以寂止”:以烦恼之寂止。“到彼岸”:已至涅槃,任何一位证得涅槃的比丘,都不是那样的。他最多只能到这种程度,并没有哪位声闻弟子比长老更超胜。巴利
Tasmāti yasmā maggena sujjhanti, na gottadhanehi, tasmā. Yoniso vicine dhammanti upāyena bodhipakkhiyadhammaṃ vicineyya. Evaṃ tattha visujjhatīti evaṃ tasmiṃ ariyamagge visujjhati. Atha vā yoniso vicine dhammanti upāyena ariyasaccadhammaṃ vicineyya. Evaṃ tattha visujjhatīti evaṃ tesu catūsu ariyasaccesu visujjhati. Idāni sāriputtattherassa vaṇṇaṃ kathento ‘‘sāriputtovā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sāriputtovāti avadhāraṇavacanaṃ, etehi paññādīhi sāriputtova seyyoti vadati. Upasamenāti kilesavūpasamena. Pāraṅgatoti nibbānaṃ gato, yo koci nibbānapatto bhikkhu, na tādiso. Etāvaparamo siyā, na therā uttaritaro nāma sāvako atthīti vadati.
“过去”是指过去的五蕴。“不应追随”:不应以渴爱和邪见去追随。“不应期盼”:不应以渴爱和邪见去期盼。“因为过去”这句在这里是说明原因。因为凡是过去的,就已经被断除、已灭、已消逝,所以不应去追随它。又因为凡是那里尚未到来的,就是还没到达、还没生起、还没出现的,所以也不应去期盼它。“在处处”:对于现在生起的法,它在何处生起,就在那里以无常随观等七种随观去观察它;或者在山林等处,处处观察。“不可动摇、不可破坏”:这是为了说明观与再观。因为观确实不会被贪等烦恼所动摇、所破坏,所以是不可动摇、不可破坏的;应当不断修习、增长它、再再观察它,这就是这句话的意思。另一种解释是:涅槃不会被贪等烦恼所动摇、所破坏,所以是不可动摇、不可破坏的;有智慧的贤善比丘应当不断修习它,也就是一次又一次以涅槃为所缘而入果定,使它增长。巴利
Atītanti atīte pañcakkhandhe. Nānvāgameyyāti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi nānugaccheyya. Nappaṭikaṅkheti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi na pattheyya. Yadatītanti idamettha kāraṇavacanaṃ. Yasmā yaṃ atītaṃ, taṃpahīnaṃ niruddhaṃ atthaṅgataṃ, tasmā taṃ nānugaccheyya. Yasmā ca yaṃ tattha anāgataṃ, taṃ appattaṃ ajātaṃ anibbattaṃ, tasmā tampi na pattheyya. Tattha tatthāti paccuppannampi dhammaṃ yattha yattheva so uppanno, tattha tattheva naṃ aniccānupassanādīhi sattahi anupassanāhi vipassati, araññādīsu vā tattha tattha vipassati. Asaṃhīraṃ asaṃkuppanti idaṃ vipassanāpaṭivipassanādassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Vipassanā hi rāgādīhi na saṃhirati na kuppatīti asaṃhīrā asaṃkuppā, taṃ anubrūhaye vaḍḍheyya paṭivipasseyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā nibbānaṃ rāgādīhi na saṃhirati na kuppatīti asaṃhīraṃ asaṃkuppaṃ, taṃ vidvā paṇḍito bhikkhu anubrūhaye, punappunaṃ tadārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ appento vaḍḍheyyāti attho.
为了增长这种修习,今天就必须下功夫。所谓“热勤”,就是通过烦恼的灼烧、煎逼而得到这个名字的精进力,今天就应该去做。谁知道死亡明天会不会来?明天是活着还是死去,谁也不知道。今天我要布施,或者要持戒,或者要修某种善法,不要生起这样的心:“今天先忙这些琐事,明天或者后天再了知。”而应该想:“今天就要做。”应当这样展示精进力。所谓“与大军”,是因为毒蛇、蝎子、毒药、刀剑等无数致死之因,就是死魔的大军。以那支大军的力量,与这样的死魔之间,既没有“请等几天,等我做完佛事等自己应做的业”这种以朋友情谊方式所说的交涉,也没有“拿这些百或千来,请等几天”这种以贿赂方式所说的交涉,也没有“我要用这支兵力击退它”这种以兵力方式所说的交涉。所谓“交涉”,就是缔结友谊、给予贿赂、聚集兵力这些事的名称,因此说了这个意思。所谓“不疲怠”,就是不懒惰、勤奋。由于这样修行,所以是贤善的一夜,即“贤善一夜”。所谓“如是”,就是这样。对于这样修行的人,因贪等止息而寂静的佛陀牟尼宣说:“此人是贤善一夜者。”巴利
Tassa pana anubrūhanassa atthāya ajjeva kiccamātappanti kilesānaṃ ātāpanaparitāpanena ‘‘ātappa’’nti laddhanāmaṃ vīriyaṃ ajjeva kātabbaṃ. Ko jaññā maraṇaṃ suveti sve jīvitaṃ vā maraṇaṃ vā ko jānāti. Ajjeva dānaṃ dassāmi, sīlaṃ vā rakkhissāmi, aññataraṃ vā pana kusalaṃ karissāmi, ‘‘ajja tāva papañco atthi, sve vā punadivase vā jānissāmī’’ti cittaṃ anuppādetvā ‘‘ajjeva karissāmī’’ti evaṃ vīriyaṃ kātabbanti dasseti. Mahāsenenāti ahivicchikavisasatthādīni hi anekāni maraṇakāraṇāni tassa senāti tāya mahatiyā senāya vasena mahāsenena evarūpena maccunā saddhiṃ ‘‘katipāhaṃ tāva āgamehi, yāvāhaṃ buddhapūjādiṃ attano avassayaṃ kammaṃ karomī’’ti evaṃ mittasanthavākārasaṅkhāto vā ‘‘idaṃ sataṃ vā sahassaṃ vā gahetvā katipāhaṃ āgamehī’’ti evaṃ lañjānuppadānasaṅkhāto vā ‘‘iminā balarāsinā paṭibāhissāmī’’ti evaṃ balarāsisaṅkhāto vā saṅgaro natthi. Saṅgaroti hi mittakaraṇalañjadānabalarāsisaṅkaḍḍhanānaṃ nāmaṃ, tasmā ayamattho vutto. Atanditanti analasaṃ uṭṭhāhakaṃ. Evaṃ paṭipannattā bhaddo ekaratto assāti bhaddekaratto. Itīti evaṃ paṭipannaṃ puggalaṃ ‘‘bhaddekaratto aya’’nti rāgādisantatāya santo buddhamuni ācikkhati.
“以眼与慧”,意思是用眼和慧,或者是以成为眼的慧。“以念与慧”,意思是用念和慧,或者是以念为最胜的慧。“以身”,指的是名身。巴利
Cakkhunā paññāya cāti cakkhunā ca paññāya ca. Cakkhubhūtāya vā paññāya. Satiyā paññāya cāti satiyā ca paññāya ca, sativisiṭṭhāya vā paññāya. Kāyenāti nāmakāyena.
“天眼极清净”是指天眼非常清净,意思是说他亲自证得了它。“宿住”是指过去世中曾住过的诸蕴。“神变种类”是指各种神通类别。“灭”是指涅槃。其余部分都很容易理解。巴利
Dibbacakkhusuvisuddhanti dibbaṃ cakkhu suvisuddhaṃ, yaṃ sacchikarotīti adhippāyo. Pubbenivāsāti purimāsu jātīsu nivutthakkhandhā. Iddhividhāti iddhikoṭṭhāsā. Nirodhoti nibbānaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
心像石头一样,是指心像一整块岩石,不会被平常的风、也不会被世间法的风所动摇,所以说心像石头一样。因此说“安住不动摇”。在可染著的地方,是指利得等境界。在可忿怒的地方,是指不得等境界。苦从哪里来呢?对这样已修心、已超越世间法的无上之人,由世间法所引起的苦不会跟随他。巴利
Yassaselūpamaṃ cittanti ekaghanaṃ selaṃ viya pakativātehi lokadhammavātehi akampanīyato yassa cittaṃ selūpamaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘ṭhitaṃ nānupakampatī’’ti. Rajanīyesūti lābhādīsu. Kopaneyyeti alābhādike. Kuto naṃ dukkhamessatīti taṃ evaṃ bhāvitacittaṃ vītikkantalokadhammaṃ uttamapurisaṃ lokadhammahetukaṃ dukkhaṃ nānugamissati.
被称为“婆罗门”的人,是因为他已经舍离了种种恶法,所以才是婆罗门;不是像有些人那样,靠着看吉兆、发出“吽吽”声等烦恼恶法,仅仅因为出身就自称是婆罗门。这样的婆罗门,因为已经舍离了恶法,断除了“吽吽”声,所以不再有“吽吽”声;因为没有贪等烦恼,所以没有烦恼;因为以戒律防护、调伏了心,所以心得调御。他以四种道智为“明”,到达了涅槃的尽头,或者说到达了一切明的尽头,所以是“明到尽头者”;因为已在道上圆满修完梵行,所以是“已住梵行者”。他能如法地宣说梵论——他会说“我是婆罗门”这样的话。在一切世间众生所居之处,无论对任何所缘,他都没有贪的增盛、嗔的增盛、痴的增盛、慢的增盛、见的增盛——意思是,这些增盛在他身上完全不存在。巴利
Yo brāhmaṇoti bāhitapāpadhammatāya brāhmaṇo, na diṭṭhamaṅgalikatāya huṃhuṅkārakasāvādipāpadhammayutto hutvā kevalaṃ jātimattena brāhmaṇoti paṭijānāti. So brāhmaṇo bāhitapāpadhammattā huṃhuṅkārappahānena nihuṃhuṅko. Rāgādikasāvābhāvena nikkabhāvo. Sīlasaṃvarena saṃyatacittatāya yatatto. Catumaggañāṇasaṅkhātehi vedehi antaṃ nibbānaṃ, vedānaṃ vā antaṃ gatattā vedantagū. Maggabrahmacariyassa vusitattā vūsitabrahmacariyo. Dhammena so brahmavādaṃ vadeyyāti so ‘‘brāhmaṇo aha’’nti etaṃ vādaṃ vadeyya. Yassa sakalalokasannivāse kuhiñci ekārammaṇepi rāgussado dosussado mohussado mānussado diṭṭhussadoti ime ussadā natthīti attho.
不住立,就是不站住、不得立足。善星,是指被称为善星的星宿。如果有人怀疑:假如那里没有日月等光明,那不就只有黑暗了吗?为了回应这个疑问,所以说那里没有黑暗。而在“以自身亲证”等经句中,当他以自身亲证的智慧体验到这样的涅槃时,他就从色法与无色法、从苦与乐中彻底解脱出来了。巴利
Na gādhatīti na patiṭṭhahati. Sukkāti sukkasaṅkhātā gahā. Yadi candimasūriyādīnaṃ pabhā tattha natthi, tamo eva ca siyāti āsaṅkamāne sandhāyāha ‘‘tamo tattha na vijjatī’’ti. Yadā ca attanāvedītiādīsu evaṃvidhaṃ nibbānaṃ attapaccakkhena ñāṇena yadā vindati, atha rūpārūpadhammato sukhadukkhato ca vippamutto hotīti.
所谓“在自己的诸法上”,就是指被称为自身生命体的诸取蕴。因为大多数情况下,内观的专注力就是落在自己身上。这个“毗舍遮”:阿迦罗婆迦,这就是你所说的毗舍遮,也就是烦恼毗舍遮。“混乱”:是你造成的混乱,也就是制造混乱。“超越”:就是越过。巴利
Sakesu dhammesūti sakaattabhāvasaṅkhātesu upādānakkhandhesu. Yebhuyyena hi ajjhattaṃ vipassanābhiniveso hotīti. Etaṃ pisācanti ajakalāpaka, etaṃ tayā vuttaṃ pisācaṃ kilesapisācañca. Pakkulanti tayā kataṃ akkulaṃ pakkulakaraṇañca. Ativattatīti atikkamati.
对前妻或其他女人来到跟前,他既不欢喜,心里也不接受。对她们离开,他也不忧愁。从五种结缚中解脱的僧伽摩吉比丘。巴利
Nābhinandatiāyantinti purāṇadutiyikaṃ āgacchantiṃ aññaṃ vā na abhinandati cittena na sampaṭicchati. Tameva pakkamantiṃ na socati. Saṅgā saṅgāmajiṃ muttanti pañcavidhāpi saṅgato muttaṃ saṅgāmajiṃ bhikkhuṃ.
这里很多人沐浴,意思是说,很多人在这里洗澡,但并不会因此就成为清净的人。巴利
Bahvetthāti bahu ettha nhāyati jano, na tena so suddho nāma hotīti adhippāyo.
他们遮止种姓之力,即遮止种姓之力的东西。所谓“实为伴侣”,是因为他们以共同修习止与观的方式而成为伴侣。所谓“长夜合会者”,是因为时常听闻适宜之法,长久地相聚交往,所以叫长夜合会者。所谓“起懈”,就是让精进变得松懈,也就是变得懈怠。巴利
Jātibalaṃnisedhanti jātibalassa nisedhakaṃ. Sahāyā vatāti samathavipassanābhāvanāya saha ayanavasena sahāyā vata. Kālena kālaṃ sappāyadhammassa savanavasena cirarattaṃ sameti samāgamo etesanti cirarattasametikā. Sithilamārabbhāti sithilaṃ vīriyaṃ katvā.
比丘们,对此,什么是差别呢?这是为了说明:导师和声闻弟子在五取蕴上生起厌离等,无论在前分修行阶段还是在无取解脱上,下面和上面都没有差别。正如经中所说:“解脱没有差别。”在这里,用“对此有什么差别”来点明没有差别。“精勤”是指额外的努力。“差异”说的就是差别。巴利
Tatra kho, bhikkhave, ko visesoti satthu sāvakassa ca pañcasveva upādānakkhandhesu nibbidādayoti pubbabhāgapaṭipattiyaṃ anupādāvimuttiyañca heṭṭhā upari ca visesābhāvaṃ dasseti. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘natthi vimuttiyā nānatta’’nti (a. ni. 5.31; kathā. 355 atthato samānaṃ). Tattha visesābhāvaṃ paccāmasati ‘‘tatra ko viseso’’ti. Adhippayāsoti adhikapayogo. Nānākaraṇanti ca visesoyeva vutto.
比丘们,这就是差别。比丘们,虽然在解脱上声闻弟子和导师并没有差别,但正自觉者是以自然智断尽了一切烦恼和习气,证悟了正等正觉之后,能在其他众生的心相续中让尚未生起的圣道生起等等,具备了一切知者的一切功德。这就是正自觉者与慧解脱者的差别。
其中,尚未生起的,是指还不存在的。因为迦叶正自觉佛曾让圣道生起,在那之后并没有另一位导师能让它生起,所以这位世尊就被称为让未生之道生起的人。未曾生的,是它的同义词。「未宣说的」:从未被宣说过的巴利
Ayaṃ kho, bhikkhave, visesoti bhikkhave, yadipi sāvakassa satthu ca vimuttiyaṃ viseso natthi, sayambhuñāṇena pana savāsanasabbakilese khepetvā sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhitvā anuppannassa ariyamaggassa parasantāne uppādanādisakalasabbaññuguṇasamāyogo. Ayaṃ sammāsambuddhassa paññāvimuttato visesoti. Tattha anuppannassāti avattamānassa. Ariyamaggañhi kassapasammāsambuddho uppādesi. Antarā añño satthā uppādetā nāma nāhosi, tasmā ayaṃ bhagavā anuppannassa maggassa uppādetā nāma. Asañjātassāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Anakkhātassāti akathitassa. Maggaṃ jānātīti maggaññū. Maggaṃ viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ akāsīti maggavidū. Magge ca amagge ca kovidoti maggakovido. Maggānugāti maggaṃ anugacchantā. Pacchāsamannāgatāti ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ samannāgato, sāvakā pacchā samannāgatā.
“出生在低贱家族”等等,由于与那种黑暗相应,所以叫黑暗。又因为造作身恶行等之后会投生到地狱的黑暗中,所以叫以黑暗为归宿。这样一来,通过这两方面说的就都是与蕴有关的黑暗。“出生在富贵家族”等等,由于与光明相应,所以叫光明,也就是成为光明的意思。又因为造作身善行等之后会投生到天界、投生到善趣,所以叫以光明为归宿。按照这个道理,其余两类人也应当这样理解。巴利
‘‘Nīce kule paccājāto’’tiādinā (a. ni. 4.85; pu. pa. 168) tamena yuttoti tamo. Kāyaduccaritādīhi puna nirayatamupagamanato tamaparāyaṇo. Iti ubhayenapi khandhatamova kathito hoti. ‘‘Aḍḍhe kule paccājāto’’tiādinā (a. ni. 4.85; pu. pa. 168) jotinā yuttoti joti, ālokabhūtoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kāyasucaritādīhi puna saggūpapattibhavūpagamanato jotiparāyaṇo. Iminā nayena itarepi dve veditabbā.
智者不称此为坚固的束缚,这里的智者指佛陀等有智慧的人。铁制的锁链、木制的脚镣,以及用芦苇草编成绳子所做的捆绑,这些东西都能用刀剑等砍断,所以智者不称它们为坚固,这就是这句话的意思。极度贪著是指一再染著、被强烈的贪欲所染。于宝石与耳环是指对宝石和耳环,或对镶嵌宝石的耳环。此是坚固的,是说那些对宝石与耳环极度贪染的人,他们对这些东西生起的贪,以及对儿女妻子的牵挂与渴爱,这种由烦恼构成的束缚,有智慧的人才称之为坚固。巴利
Na taṃ daḷhaṃ bandhanamāhu dhīrāti ettha dhīrāti buddhādayo paṇḍitapurisā. Yaṃ saṅkhalikasaṅkhātaṃ ayena nibbattaṃ āyasaṃ addubandhanasaṅkhātaṃ dārumayañca pabbajatiṇehi rajjuṃ katvā katarajjubandhanañca, taṃ asiādīhi chindituṃ sakkuṇeyyatāya ‘‘thira’’nti na vadantīti attho. Sārattarattāti rattā hutvā rattā. Balavarāgarattāti attho. Maṇikuṇḍalesūti maṇīsu ca kuṇḍalesu ca, maṇicittesu vā kuṇḍalesu. Etaṃ daḷhanti ye maṇikuṇḍalesu sārattarattā, tesu yo rāgo, yā ca puttadāresu apekkhā taṇhā, etaṃ kilesamayaṃ bandhanaṃ paṇḍitapurisā ‘‘daḷha’’nti vadanti.
能把人拖下去的:因为它把人拽住,让人堕入四种恶趣,向下拉、往下拖,所以叫“拖下去”。松弛的:这种束缚在捆绑的地方不伤皮肤等,也不让人察觉自己被绑着,还让人能在水路、陆路等地方干活,所以叫“松弛”。难解脱的:因为哪怕只是由贪欲的力量生起一次的烦恼束缚,也像乌龟咬住东西一样难以松开、难以摆脱,所以叫“难解脱”。也要斩断它:意思是用智慧之剑斩断这坚固的烦恼束缚之后,成为无所牵挂的人,舍弃欲乐,出家、离去、修行。巴利
Ohārinanti ākaḍḍhitvā catūsu apāyesu pātanato avaharati heṭṭhā haratīti ohārinaṃ. Sithilanti bandhanaṭṭhāne chaviādīni akopetvā bandhanabhāvampi ajānāpetvā jalapathathalapathādīsu kammaṃ kātuṃ detīti sithilaṃ. Duppamuñcanti lobhavasena hi ekavārampi uppannaṃ kilesabandhanaṃ daṭṭhaṭṭhānato kacchapo viya dummocayaṃ hotīti duppamuñcaṃ. Etampi chetvānāti etaṃ daḷhampi kilesabandhanaṃ ñāṇakhaggena chinditvā anapekkhino hutvā kāmasukhaṃ pahāya paribbajanti pakkamanti pabbajanti cāti attho.
“思”是指以不善的思心所去思。“筹划”是指把同一个不善的思心所,以导向身业和语业的恶劣方式去谋划。“随眠”是指贪等随眠本身在相续中未被断除而潜伏着。“这成为识安住的所缘”,意思是:这个思、筹划和随眠,成为行作识安住和持续运转的条件。“在所缘存在时,识就有了立足处”,意思是:当所说的条件存在时,行作识通过完成速行、造业,从而具备牵引结生的能力,识就有了立足处。“未来会有后有的再生”,意思是:在未来,称为后有的识等名色会再次生起,巴利
Cetetīti akusalacetanāvasena ceteti. Pakappetīti tameva akusalacetanaṃ kāyavacīkammabhāvaṃ pāpanavasena kappeti. Anusetīti rāgādianusayova santāne appahīnabhāvena anuseti. Ārammaṇametaṃ hoti viññāṇassa ṭhitiyāti yadetaṃ cetanaṃ pakappanaṃ anusayanañca, etaṃ abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa ṭhitiyā pavattiyā paccayo hotīti attho. Ārammaṇe sati patiṭṭhā viññāṇassa hotīti yathāvuttapaccaye sati abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa kammaṃ javāpetvā paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanasamatthatāsampādanato patiṭṭhā hoti. Āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbatti hotīti āyatiṃ punabbhavasaṅkhātā viññāṇādīnaṃ abhinibbatti hoti.
“比丘们,如果不作意”等话,否定的就是不善业。这里简要的意思是:即使有时候因为如理作意,不善的思没有生起,但随眠还没有被断除,它们仍然会成为善的行作识的立足处。而行作识存在,未来就会有后有的再生,这样说完全成立。第三种情况应当按与上面所说的相反的道理来理解。巴利
‘‘No ce, bhikkhave, cetetī’’tiādinā akusalakammameva paṭikkhipati. Ayañhettha saṅkhepattho, yadipi kadāci yonisomanasikārā akusalacetanā nappavattati, anusayā pana appahīnāti, te kusalassa abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa patiṭṭhā honti yevāti. Sati ca abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇe āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbatti hotīti vattuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Tatiyavāro vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbo.
比丘们,在圣者的教法里,这并不算大海。之所以这样说,是为了表明:如果因为难以填满、沉没、难以越过,而把海洋叫作海,那么用这个道理来看,这个比喻也适用于眼等处,乃至百倍千倍。所以佛陀说:比丘们,眼是人的大海,它的波涛是色所构成的。意思是,因为众生被种种色所吸引、所攫取,所以色处本身就是眼海的波涛。巴利
‘‘Neso, bhikkhave, ariyassa vinaye samuddo’’tiādi yadi duppūraṇaṭṭhena saṃsīdanaṭṭhena duratikkamanaṭṭhena sāgaro ‘‘samuddo’’ti vucceyya, tato satabhāgenapi sahassabhāgenapi cakkhuādīsveva ayaṃ nayo labbhatīti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘cakkhu, bhikkhave, purisassa samuddo, tassa rūpamayo vego’’ti, rūpesu sattānaṃ āviñchanato rūpāyatanameva vego cakkhussa vegoti attho.
如果有人能承受那由色法形成的汹涌洪流,意思就是:有位比丘连同所缘一起,以无常、苦、无我的角度观照眼,并在那里厌离、离贪,从与它相连的烦恼网中解脱出来,从而战胜、超越它。比丘们,这就叫作“已渡越眼之海”——也就是说,这位比丘已经渡过了被称为“眼”的大海。巴利
Yo taṃ rūpamayaṃ vegaṃ sahatīti yo bhikkhu saha visayena cakkhuṃ aniccato dukkhato anattato sammasanto tattha ca nibbindanto virajjanto tappaṭibaddhato kilesajālato vimuccanto abhibhavati. Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, atari cakkhusamuddanti ayaṃ bhikkhu cakkhusaṅkhātaṃ samuddaṃ tiṇṇoti vuccati.
还有一种理解方式:比丘们,在圣者的教法中,眼就是海。虽然从“难以填满”这个角度,或者从“汇集”这个角度,都可以叫海,但眼本身就是海。因为从大地一直到色究竟天,眼所接收的种种青、黄等对象,都没办法让它达到满足。所以从“难以填满”这个角度来说,它就是海。再者,眼在面对种种青、黄等对象时,不加防护地接收,成为烦恼生起的原因,带着过失而运作,所以从“汇集”这个角度来说,它也是海。同样,眼是贪爱之流等生起的门径,由于它们使相续汇集、润湿,所以从“汇集”和“润湿”这两个角度来说,它也是海。对于这个在眼之海中汇集的色所成之流——面对可意的色法生起贪,面对不可意的色法生起嗔,面对中等所缘境生起痴——他以舍心的状态,让这些贪等烦恼都不生起,从而克服它。巴利
Aparo nayo – cakkhu, bhikkhave, ariyassa vinaye samuddoti yadipi duppūraṇaṭṭhena yadi vā samudanaṭṭhena samuddo, cakkhumeva samuddo. Tassa hi pathavito yāva akaniṭṭhabrahmalokā nīlādiārammaṇaṃ samosarantaṃ paripuṇṇabhāvaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti. Evaṃ duppūraṇaṭṭhenapi samuddo. Cakkhu ca tesu tesu nīlādiārammaṇesu samudeti asaṃvutaṃ hutvā osaramānaṃ kilesuppattiyā kāraṇabhāvena sadosabhāvena gacchatīti samudanaṭṭhenapi samuddo. Tathā cakkhuṃ taṇhāsotādīnaṃ uppattidvāratāya tehi santānassa samudanaṭṭhena temanaṭṭhena samuddo. Tassa rūpamayo vegoti samuddassa appamāṇo ūmimayo vego viya tassāpi cakkhusamuddassa samosarantassa nīlādibhedassa ārammaṇassa vasena appameyyo rūpamayo vego veditabbo. Yo taṃ rūpamayaṃ vegaṃ sahatīti yo taṃ cakkhusamudde samosarantaṃ rūpamayaṃ vegaṃ manāpe rūpe rāgaṃ, amanāpe dosaṃ, asamapekkhane mohanti evaṃ rāgādikilese anuppādento upekkhakabhāvena sahati.
在“有波浪的”等说法中,是指被烦恼的波浪所冲击,所以叫“有波浪的”;被烦恼的漩涡所卷,所以叫“有漩涡的”;被烦恼的鳄鱼所抓,所以叫“有鳄鱼的”;被烦恼的罗刹所害,所以叫“有罗刹的”。也可以说,以愤怒和忧恼的力量而叫“有波浪的”;以五种欲乐的力量而叫“有漩涡的”;以女人的缘故而叫“有鳄鱼的、有罗刹的”。经中确实这样说过:“比丘们,‘波浪的恐怖’就是愤怒和忧恼的另一种说法。同样,比丘们,‘漩涡’就是五种欲乐的另一种说法。比丘们,‘鳄鱼、罗刹’就是女人的另一种说法。”在其余的眼、耳、鼻、舌、身等门类中,也是同样的道理。巴利
Saūmintiādīsu kilesaūmīhi saūmiṃ. Kilesavaṭṭehi sāvaṭṭaṃ. Kilesagahehi sagahaṃ. Kilesarakkhasehi sarakkhasaṃ. Kodhupāyāsassa vā vasena saūmiṃ. Kāmaguṇavasena sāvaṭṭaṃ. Mātugāmavasena sagahaṃ sarakkhasaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘ūmibhayanti kho, bhikkhave, kodhupāyāsassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ (itivu. 109; ma. ni. 2.162; a. ni. 4.122). Tathā āvaṭṭanti kho, bhikkhave, pañcannetaṃ kāmaguṇānaṃ adhivacanaṃ (itivu. 109; ma. ni. 2.164; a. ni. 4.122). Gaharakkhasoti kho, bhikkhave, mātugāmassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (itivu. 109). Sesadvāresupi eseva nayo.
他渡过了有波浪之怖畏、难以渡越的境地,也就是以无常等波浪之怖畏为令人恐惧、极难超越,他超越了它。已到世间尽头的人,就是到达了轮回世间的尽头。被称为已到彼岸的人,就是被说为已到达涅槃的人。巴利
Saūmibhayaṃduttaraṃ accatarīti aniccatādiūmibhayena sabhayaṃ duratikkamaṃ atikkami. Lokantagūti saṃsāralokassa antaṃ gato. Pāragatoti vuccatīti nibbānaṃ gatoti kathīyati.
渔钩:因为它像渔钩一样,是给众生带来伤害的原因,所以叫渔钩。为不幸:就是为无利益。为恼害:就是为痛苦。可爱的:不论已被追求还是未被追求,因为它是带来快乐的所缘,所以是可爱的。以值得希求之义,是悦意的;以使心增长之义,是令人欢喜的;以本性可爱,是令人欢喜的形色。因为与烦恼欲相应,是引生欲望的。以能生贪、令心染着之义,是令人染着的。若对此:指那色所缘。色处虽然按青、黄等分为种种差别,但作为色所缘和作为眼所识,都不超出同一类,因此取那同类的自性,说“若对此”。欢喜:以成为欢喜、伴有喜悦的渴爱,当面欢喜。迎赞:以“啊!快乐啊!啊!快乐啊!”这样的方式令其宣说,依渴爱的方式表示迎赞。耽着而住:吞没、彻底安立之后而住。比丘们,这被称为吞下渔钩的比丘,这是魔的:这位比丘,被称为吞下烦恼魔的渔钩——色贪之后而住。其余诸段也应以这种方法理解其义。破坏:是破坏。遍破坏:是一切部分都破坏。其余是显明易懂的。巴利
Baḷisāti sattānaṃ anatthahetutāya baḷisā viya baḷisā. Anayāyāti anatthāya. Byābādhāyāti dukkhāya. Iṭṭhāti pariyiṭṭhā vā apariyiṭṭhā vā sukhārammaṇatāya iṭṭhā. Kāmanīyaṭṭhena kantā. Manassa vaḍḍhanaṭṭhena manāpā. Piyasabhāvatāya piyarūpā. Kilesakāmasahitattā kāmūpasaṃhitā. Rāgajananaṭṭhena cittassa rañjanato rajanīyā. Tañceti taṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ, nīlādivasena anekabhedabhinnampi hi rūpāyatanaṃ rūpārammaṇabhāvena cakkhuviññeyyabhāvena ca ekavidhataṃ nātivattatīti taṃsabhāvasāmaññaṃ gahetvā ‘‘tañce’’ti vuttaṃ. Abhinandatīti abhinandanabhūtāya sappītikataṇhāya abhimukho nandati. Abhivadatīti ‘‘aho sukhaṃ, aho sukha’’nti vadāpentiyā taṇhāyanavasena abhivadati. Ajjhosāya tiṭṭhatīti gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā tiṭṭhati. Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu gilitabaḷiso mārassāti ayaṃ, bhikkhu, kilesamārassa baḷisabhūtaṃ rūpataṇhaṃ gilitvā ṭhitoti vuccati. Sesavāresupi iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Abhedīti bhindi. Paribhedīti sabbabhāgena bhindi. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
这个世间是热恼所生:这里的“世间”指有情世间,意思是说,众生天生就带着热恼——因亲人离散等事而生起的忧愁热恼,以及因贪欲等事而生起的燃烧般的热恼。“被触所制”:被许多苦触所压倒。“哭泣着说自己的苦”:因为没能修好身体,忍受不了自己碰上的种种苦,就哭喊着说:“苦啊!这样的苦,连我的敌人也别碰上!”诸如此类地哀号着说。为什么呢?因为无论人们怎么想,事情总是变成另一个样子——这些众生无论用什么方式想对治自己的苦、期盼消除它,那苦却偏偏要用另一种方式才能治好;或者无论用什么方式想让自己增长,结果却变成另一个样子,反而没有增长。就这样,因为事情变成了另一个样子,他们遭遇的只是愿望的落空。这个执着于存在的众生,在欲有等诸有中执著,这就是有情世间;即便如此,他们还是只欢喜存在,不对那里厌离。“他所欢喜的,就是怖畏”:凡是欢喜欲有等存在的,那就是怖畏,因为它伴随着老死等种种灾祸,以极其恐怖的含义而成为怖畏。“他所畏惧的,就是苦”:凡是畏惧老死等的,那就是苦,因为那是苦的立足处,而且属于苦苦。巴利
Ayaṃ loko santāpajātoti ayaṃ sattaloko jātasantāpo ñātibyasanādivasena uppannasokasantāpo ca rāgādivasena uppannapariḷāhasantāpo cāti attho. Phassaparetoti anekehi dukkhaphassehi abhibhūto. Rodaṃ vadati attatoti taṃ taṃ attanā phuṭṭhaṃ dukkhaṃ abhāvitakāyatāya adhivāsetuṃ asakkonto ‘‘aho dukkhaṃ, īdisaṃ dukkhaṃ mayhaṃ sattunopi mā hotū’’tiādinā vilapanto vadati. Kasmā? Yena yena hi maññanti, tato taṃ hoti aññathā, yasmā ete sattā yena yena pakārena attano dukkhassa paṭikāraṃ maññanti āsīsanti, taṃ dukkhaṃ tato aññena pakārena tikicchitabbaṃ hoti. Yena vā pakārena attano vaḍḍhiṃ maññanti, tato aññathā avaḍḍhi eva pana hoti. Evaṃ aññathābhāvitaṃ icchāvighātaṃ eva pāpuṇāti. Ayaṃ bhavasatto kāmādibhavesu satto sattaloko, tathāpi bhavamevābhinandati, na tattha nibbindati. Yadabhinandati taṃ bhayanti yaṃ kāmādibhavaṃ abhinandati, taṃ jarāmaraṇādianekabyasanānubandhattā ativiya bhayānakaṭṭhena bhayaṃ. Yassa bhāyatīti yato jarāmaraṇādito bhāyati, taṃ dukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato dukkhadukkhatāya ca dukkhanti.
为了断除有这句话的意思是:为了舍弃有。正是这个词表示决定。这里说的是:正是要通过断除欲有等有的集起,为了断除的目的,我所证得的这道与梵行才被修习。巴利
Bhavavippahānāyāti bhavassa pajahanatthāya. Khoti avadhāraṇatthe nipāto. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ekanteneva kāmādibhavassa samudayappahānena pahānatthaṃ idaṃ mayā adhigataṃ maggabrahmacariyaṃ vussatīti.
这样显示了圣道确实唯一导向解脱之后,现在为了驳斥其他道路也能导向解脱的说法,世尊说了“凡任何”等话。其中,“以有”:是指以色界有或无色界有。“从有”:是指从轮回。“彻底解脱”:是指从有中解脱,也就是轮回清净的意思。虽然那些沙门婆罗门认为那种境界就是涅槃,但他们其实是依靠导向有的业、色界和无色界的禅那,以及由这些禅那所引生的再生有,而说“有清净”;这就等于说他们是以有而说“从有解脱”。因此世尊说:“我说他们一切都没有从有解脱。”或者另一种解释:“以有”是指有见;因为“有”就是存在、持续、恒常,由于这样转起,常见就被称为“有见”。就像“有爱”等说法一样,这里的“有见”省略了后面的词,直接说成“有”。依于常见,这里有些人认为某种殊胜的有就是从有中彻底解脱。正如梵天巴卡所说:“这是常,这是恒,这是永恒,这是不变易的法。”“以非有”:是指断见。因为“非有”就是毁灭、消失、断灭,由于这样转起,断见按上述方式被称为“非有”。他们说“从有的出离”,就是说了“轮回清净”。依于断见,这里有些人说轮回清净。正如这样说——巴利
Evaṃ ariyassa maggassa ekaṃseneva niyyānikabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni aññamaggassa niyyānikabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipanto ‘‘ye hi kecī’’tiādimāha. Tattha bhavenāti rūpabhavena vā arūpabhavena vā. Bhavassāti saṃsārassa. Vippamokkhanti bhavato vimuttiṃ, saṃsārasuddhinti attho. Kiñcāpi te samaṇabrāhmaṇā tattha nibbānasaññino, bhavagāmikammena pana rūpārūpajjhānena , taṃnibbattena ca upapattibhavena bhavavisuddhiṃ vadantā bhavena bhavavippamokkhaṃ vadanti nāma. Tenāha – ‘‘sabbe te avippamuttā bhavasmāti vadāmī’’ti. Atha vā bhavenāti bhavadiṭṭhiyā, bhavati tiṭṭhati sassatanti hi pavattanato sassatadiṭṭhi ‘‘bhavadiṭṭhī’’ti vuccati. Bhavadiṭṭhi eva uttarapadalopena ‘‘bhavo’’ti vuttā bhavataṇhātiādīsu viya. Bhavadiṭṭhivasena hi idhekacce bhavavisesaṃyeva bhavavippamokkhaṃ maññanti. Yathā taṃ bako brahmā āha – ‘‘idaṃ niccaṃ, idaṃ dhuvaṃ, idaṃ sassataṃ, idaṃ avipariṇāmadhamma’’nti (ma. ni. 1.501; saṃ. ni. 1.175). Vibhavenāti ucchedadiṭṭhiyā. Vibhavati vinassati ucchijjatīti hi pavattanato ucchedadiṭṭhi vuttanayena ‘‘vibhavo’’ti vuccati. Bhavassa nissaraṇamāhaṃsūti saṃsārasuddhiṃ vadiṃsu. Ucchedadiṭṭhivasena hi idhekacce saṃsārasuddhiṃ vadanti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
贤者们,当这个我具有色身、由四大组成……乃至证得非想非非想处而安住。贤者们,到这个程度,这个我就被彻底断除了。巴利
‘‘Yato kho, bho, ayaṃ attā rūpī cātumahābhūtiko…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ettāvatā kho, bho, ayaṃ attā sammā samucchinno hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.91).
未出离,就是没有脱离。这里说出了它的原因:“因为依靠取著,这个苦才产生。”这里的“取著”指蕴等取著。这是在说什么呢?这些见行者把那里当成涅槃,而在那里,蕴取著、烦恼取著、行取著都已经被他们证得、知道了。那怎么可能是苦的出离呢?为了显示究竟意义上的苦的出离,所以这样说:“由于一切取著灭尽,苦就不再产生。”巴利
Anissaṭāti anikkhantā. Tattha kāraṇamāha – ‘‘upadhiñhi paṭicca dukkhamidaṃ sambhotī’’ti. Tattha upadhinti khandhādiupadhiṃ. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yattha ime diṭṭhigatikā nibbānasaññino, tattha khandhūpadhikilesūpadhiabhisaṅkhārūpadhayo adhigatā ñātā. Kuto tassa dukkhanissaraṇatāti. Yaṃ pana paramatthato dukkhanissaraṇaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbupādānakkhayā natthi dukkhassa sambhavo’’ti vuttaṃ.
世尊呼唤自己的心说:“看看这个世间。”所谓“种种”,就是各各不同。所谓“被无明所驱使”,就是被愚痴所征服。所谓“已生起者”,就是指五蕴。所谓“乐着于已生起者”,就是女人贪恋男人、男人贪恋女人,众生就这样互相贪着,因此不能从诸有中解脱。所谓“凡所有诸有”,就是不论短寿的、长寿的、快乐的、不快乐的诸有。所谓“一切处”,就是上方、下方、横向,即到处皆是。所谓“以一切方式”,就是以全部的方式。在“彼一切有”等句中,依照“一切有都是无常的”等法,以与观智相应的道智如实无倒地观见的人,他的有爱也被断除、止息,不再欢喜、希求非有和断灭;因为一切渴爱都被道毫无剩余地灭尽,所以涅槃就是寂灭。那位比丘这样寂灭之后,由于无取——不再执取烦恼和诸行,所以不会再有后有。达到这种状态的人,也战胜了五种魔,与魔的战争已经打赢,超越了一切有,在可意不可意等境界中都达到了平等不动。巴利
Lokamimaṃ passāti bhagavā attano cittaṃ ālapati. Puthūti visuṃ visuṃ. Avijjāya paretanti mohena abhibhūtaṃ. Bhūtanti khandhapañcakaṃ. Bhūtaratanti itthī purise, puriso itthiyāti evaṃ aññamaññaṃ sattesu rataṃ, tato eva bhavā aparimuttā. Ye hi keci bhavāti ittarakhaṇā vā dīghāyukā vā sātavanto vā asātavanto vā bhavā. Sabbadhīti uddhaṃ adho tiriyanti sabbattha. Sabbatthatāyāti sabbabhāvena. Sabbe te bhavātiādīsu ‘‘sabbepi bhavā aniccā’’tiādinā vipassanāsahitāya maggapaññāya aviparītaṃ passato bhavataṇhāpi pahīyati nirujjhati, vibhavaṃ ucchedampi nābhinandati na pattheti, tassa sabba taṇhānaṃ anavasesato maggena nirujjhanato nibbānaṃ nibbuti hoti. Tassa evaṃ nibbutassa bhikkhuno anupādā kilesābhisaṅkhārānaṃ anupādānato aggahaṇato punabbhavo na hoti. Evaṃbhūtena ca abhibhūto pañcavidhopi māro vijito assa anena mārena saṅgāmo, sabbepi bhave samatikkanto iṭṭhāniṭṭhādīsu tādilakkhaṇappattoti.
随顺流而行的,是盲凡夫;逆着流而行的,是善良凡夫;心安住不动摇的,是有学圣者;其余的,是无学圣者。巴利
Anusotagāmī andhaputhujjano paṭisotagāmī kalyāṇaputhujjano. Ṭhitatto sekkho. Itaro asekkho.
“出身高贵”是指种姓。“黑出身”是指生在黑皮肤、低贱家族的人。“白出身”是指生于白净高贵家族的人。“生黑法”是指他造作那十种黑暗的、没有戒德的行为;他这样造作了黑法之后,就投生到地狱。“白法”是指他这样想:“我过去因为没有积福德,才生在低贱家族,现在我要积福德。”于是他造作被称为福德的白净之法,因此投生到天界。“非黑非白涅槃”是说:如果涅槃是黑的,就该给出黑的果报;如果是白的,就该给出白的果报。但因为这两者都不适用,所以说是“非黑非白”。这里“涅槃”指的是阿罗汉果。因为它是在烦恼涅槃中产生的,所以名为涅槃。他生起、造作、实行它。“白出身”是指生在白净高贵家族的人。其余内容应依前所说而知。“黑法黑果报”等四种业的含义,已在下文“哈拉萨帕塔”部分中分别解释。巴利
Abhijātikoti jātiyo. Kaṇhābhijātikoti kaṇhe nīce kule jāto. Kaṇhaṃ dhammaṃ abhijāyatīti kāḷakaṃ dasavidhaṃ dussīladhammaṃ pasavati karoti, so taṃ abhijāyitvā niraye nibbattati. Sukkaṃ dhammanti ‘‘ahaṃ pubbepi puññānaṃ akatattā nīce kule nibbatto, idāni puññaṃ karissāmī’’ti puññasaṅkhātaṃ sukkaṃ paṇḍaraṃ dhammaṃ abhijāyati, so tena sagge nibbattati. Akaṇhaṃ asukkaṃ nibbānanti nibbānañhi sace kaṇhaṃ bhaveyya, kaṇhavipākaṃ dadeyya. Sukkaṃ, sukkavipākaṃ dadeyya. Dvinnampi appadānato pana ‘‘akaṇhaṃ asukka’’nti vuttaṃ. Nibbānanti cettha arahattaṃ adhippetaṃ. Tañhi kilesanibbānante jātattā nibbānaṃ nāma. Taṃ esa abhijāyati pasavati karoti. Sukkābhijātikoti sukke ucce kule jāto. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Kaṇhaṃ kaṇhavipāka’’ntiādikassa kammacatukkassa attho heṭṭhā hārasampātavāre vibhatto eva.
人性是指人的状态,也就是投生为人。两种是指应做的和不应做的,只有这两类。这是在说明:应做的才应当去做,任何不应做的都不该做。善行等说法,则是对前面所说的应做的具体说明。巴利
Mānusattanti manussabhāvaṃ, manussayoninti attho. Dveti kiccaṃ akiccameva cāti dve. Kiccāni tveva kattabbāni, na cākiccaṃ kiñci kattabbanti dasseti. Sukiccantiādi ‘‘kicca’’nti vuttānaṃ tesaṃ sarūpadassanaṃ.
“精勤”是指最上等、最殊胜的。在“在前面的出家者中”这一句里,用的是处所格,表示范围。第二句里用的是依格。那里的“涅槃”,指的是阿罗汉果。那为什么在这里把舍弃财物和阿罗汉果说成同等甘甜呢?是为了说明:对值得受供养的人布施,能带来大果报。“以任何一种事物”,是指以断见等事物。“执著”,是指以有贪等而执著。第二句里的“以任何一种事物”,是指以不死论摇摆等事物。巴利
Padhānānīti uttamāni visiṭṭhāni. Purimasmiṃ pabbajitesūti visaye bhummaṃ. Dutiye adhikaraṇe. Tattha nibbānanti arahattaṃ adhippetaṃ. Kasmā panettha āmisapariccāgo arahattena samadhuro niddiṭṭhoti? Dakkhiṇeyyesu dakkhiṇāya mahapphalabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Yena yena vā pana vatthunāti ucchedādivatthunā. Ajjhositāti bhavataṇhādivasena ajjhositā. Dutiye yena yena vā pana vatthunāti amarāvikkhepavatthuādinā.
以这不净的业果:因为不净的身恶行等业,其果报就是不净的,所以说是以不净、不善的业果。这里生起了愚者的特征:由于过去生中具有恶行,就生起了“这个人是愚者”这样的标记。这部经属于杂染分:如此展开的这部经,就叫做杂染分经。巴利
Imināasubhena kammavipākenāti asubhassa kāyaduccaritādikammassa vipākattā asubhena asivena kammavipākena. Idaṃ bālalakkhaṇaṃ nibbattatīti purimasmiṃ bhave duccaritasamaṅgitāya bālo ayaṃ bhavatīti upalakkhaṇaṃ jāyati. Idaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttanti idaṃ evaṃ pavattaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ nāma suttaṃ.
“以这清净的”:这里的含义要按前面所说的方式来理解。其中,“大人相”就是智者相。“烦恼地”,是指烦恼的处所,或者烦恼的状态。对还没有断除随眠的人,当各种条件聚合时,贪等烦恼就会以缠缚的方式生起。“随眠者的缠缚生起”就是这个意思。“被缠缚者即结缚”:心被贪等缠缚的人,就称为与欲贪等结缚相应。“结缚者即执取”:与欲贪结等结缚相应的人,就会执取欲取等以及不善业。其余各处都很明显易懂。巴利
Iminā subhenāti ettha vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo. Tattha mahāpurisalakkhaṇanti paṇḍitalakkhaṇaṃ. Kilesabhūmīhīti kilesaṭṭhānehi kilesāvatthāhi vā. Sānusayassa pariyuṭṭhānaṃ jāyatīti appahīnānusayassa paccayasamāyoge rāgādayo pariyuṭṭhānavasena pavattanti. Pariyuṭṭhito saṃyujjatīti yo rāgādīhi pariyuṭṭhitacitto, so kāmarāgādīhi saṃyujjati nāma. Saṃyujjanto upādiyatīti yo kāmarāgasaṃyojanādīhi saṃyutto, so kāmupādānādīni akusalakammāni ca upādiyati. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānameva.
就这样,先用十六种方式,通过引用各种经典作为例证,分析了教法的分类;现在要展示二十八种教法的分类。因为这种分类方式也被根本句所涵盖,没有任何一个部分不被它们涵盖,所以为了说明根本句应当被逐一分析,就以“其中,哪十八种是根本句?”这个问题,先列出根本句,然后以“世间、出世间”等说法列出九组三法,再加上“称赞”,总共列出了二十八种教法分类。其中,“世间”是指与世间相关联,或者在世间中被认知的,就叫世间。在这里,凡是某部经中说的是世间的义理,那部经就是世间经。出世间经也是这样。如果某部经中,一部分说世间,一部分说出世间,那部经就是世间与出世间兼具。另外,凡是依于有情、以施设有情的角度来宣说的,就是“依于有情”;纯粹依法来说的,就是“依于法”;依两者来说的,就是“依于有情及依于法”。按照这个道理,所有地方都应该这样理解。而通过赞叹佛等功德的方式所产生的经,就叫作“称赞”。巴利
Evaṃ soḷasavidhena sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ nānāsuttehi udāharaṇavasena vibhajitvā idāni aṭṭhavīsatividhena sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ dassentena yasmā ayampi paṭṭhānavibhāgo mūlapadehi saṅgahito, na imassāpi tehi asaṅgahito padeso atthi, tasmā mūlapadaṃ vibhajitabbatañca dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha katame aṭṭhārasa mūlapadā’’ti pucchāya vasena mūlapadāni uddharitvā ‘‘lokiyaṃ lokuttara’’ntiādinā navatikā, thavo cāti aṭṭhavīsatividhaṃ sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha lokiyanti loke niyutto, loke vā vidito lokiyo. Idha pana lokiyo attho yasmiṃ sutte vutto, taṃ suttaṃ lokiyaṃ. Tathā lokuttaraṃ. Yasmiṃ pana sutte padesena lokiyo, padesena lokuttaro vutto, taṃ lokiyañca lokuttarañca. Yañca satte adhiṭṭhāya sattapaññattimukhena desitaṃ, taṃ sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Dhammavaseneva desitaṃ dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Ubhayavasena desitaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānañca dhammādhiṭṭhānañca. Iminā nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo. Buddhādīnaṃ pana guṇābhitthavanavasena pavattaṃ suttaṃ thavo nāma.
这里,“鲜乳”是指刚从母牛乳房流出来、当下还温热的牛乳。“转变”就是变坏。这段话的意思是:就像刚从母牛乳房流出的牛乳,在那一刻并不会分离、不会转变、不会变成凝乳,但后来因为加入酪浆等酸性东西,过了一段时间,它就会失去原来的状态,变成凝乳。同样,恶业在造作的那一刻也不会成熟。如果当下就成熟,就不会有未来各种生命状态的存在,也没有人敢去造恶业了。只要由善业所生的诸蕴还在相续运行,它们就会保护他;当这些蕴坏灭时,恶业就以让他投生到恶趣的方式成熟。而在成熟的时候,它像火一样烧着愚人,并跟着他。像什么呢?就像被灰覆盖的火炭。比如被灰盖住的火炭,即使被踩到,因为有灰盖着,暂时不会烧起来,但它会先把灰烧热,然后烧到皮肤等,一直烧到脑髓。同样,恶业对于造作它的人,在他第二生或第三生投生到地狱等处时,就会以燃烧的方式跟着他。巴利
Tattha sajjukhīranti taṅkhaṇaṃyeva dhenuyā thanehi nikkhantaṃ abbhuṇhakhīraṃ. Muccatīti pariṇamati. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā dhenuyā thanato nikkhantaṃ khīraṃ taṅkhaṇaṃyeva na muccati na pariṇamati na dadhibhāvaṃ gacchati, takkādiambilasamāyogato pana parato kālantarena pakatiṃ jahati dadhibhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti, evamevaṃ pāpakammampi kiriyakkhaṇeyeva na vipaccati. Yadi vipacceyya, nānāgatīnaṃ sabhāvaṭṭhānaṃ siyā, na koci pāpakammaṃ kātuṃ visaheyya. Yāva pana kusalābhinibbattakkhandhā caranti, tāva taṃ te rakkhanti, tesaṃ bhedā apāyesu nibbattāpanavasena vipaccati. Vipaccamānañca ḍahantaṃ bālamanveti, kiṃ viya? Bhasmacchannova pāvako. Yathā hi chārikāya paṭicchanno vītaccitaṅgāro akkantopi chārikāya paṭicchannattā na tāva ḍahati, chārikaṃ pana tāpetvā cammādīni ḍahanavasena yāva matthaluṅgā ḍahanto gacchati, evamevaṃ pāpakammampi yena kataṃ, taṃ bālaṃ dutiye vā tatiye vā attabhāve nirayādīsu nibbattaṃ ḍahantaṃ anugacchatīti.
对于“他的诸根”这句话,简要的含义是:就像被善巧的驯马师调教好的马一样,某位比丘的六根已经达到寂静、调伏、不再向外驰逐的状态。因为他已经断除了九种慢,安住在慢已断除的状态;由于四漏彻底不存在,他成为无漏者,安住在这样的状态中。像这样的人,连天神都羡慕,人们也渴望见到他、亲近他。“在食物存在时”是指:如果对食物相关的欲贪还没有断除。巴利
Yassindriyānīti tatthāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yassa bhikkhuno chekena sārathinā sudantā assā viya cha indriyāni samathaṃ dantabhāvaṃ nibbisevanabhāvaṃ gatāni, tassa navavidhaṃ mānaṃ pahāya ṭhitattā pahīnamānassa catunnaṃ āsavānaṃ abhāvena anāsavassa tādibhāve ṭhitassa tathārūpassa devāpi pihayanti, manussāpi dassanañca āgamanañca patthentiyevāti. Āhāre satīti āhārapaṭibaddhe chandarāge appahīne sati.
用心到一切方向去周遍寻找:就是用心从四周走遍十个方向。也没有找到:就是始终找不到。更可爱:就是格外可爱。比自己:就是从自己出发。这样,各各众生都把自己的自我看得可爱:因为无论对谁,都找不到比自我更可爱的东西,所以对各个众生来说,自我就是可爱的。正因为如此,一个爱自己、想要自己快乐的人,不应该伤害别人。巴利
Sabbā disā anuparigamma cetasāti parito dasapi disā cittena anugantvā. Nevajjhagāti neva adhigaccheyya. Piyataranti atisayena piyaṃ. Attanāti attato. Evaṃ piyo puthu attā paresanti evaṃ kassacipi attanā piyatarassa anupalabbhanavasena visuṃ visuṃ paresaṃ sattānaṃ attā piyo. Yasmā ca etadeva, tasmā na hiṃse paraṃ attakāmo attano sukhakāmoti.
已生:已出生、已产生。当生:将会产生。或者,已生指诸漏已尽的人,因为他们已经舍弃了再生,所以就是已生。将去:将前往他世。而诸漏已尽的人则入无余涅槃。巴利
Bhūtāti jātā nibbattā. Bhavissantīti nibbattissanti. Bhūtāti vā khīṇāsavā. Te hi pahīnabhavattā bhūtā eva. Gamissantīti paralokaṃ gamissanti. Khīṇāsavā pana anupādisesaṃ nibbānaṃ.
他既可爱,又值得被爱,因为他具备了极其清净的戒成就和极其清净的见成就。对此,确实有这样的说法:巴利
Piyoca hotīti suparisuddhāya sīlasampattiyā, suparisuddhāya ca diṭṭhisampattiyā samannāgato piyo piyāyitabbo hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
具备戒与见,安住于法,说真实语的人,
一个人做着自己该做的事,众人就会喜欢他。巴利
‘‘Sīladassanasampannaṃ , dhammaṭṭhaṃ saccavādinaṃ; Attano kammakubbānaṃ, taṃ jano kurute piya’’nti. (dha. pa. 217);
就像石伞一样,因为应当被敬重,所以是“重”。因为依超人之法而应当被恭敬,所以是“应修习”。或者也可以由戒德而了知可爱、可敬等状态。正如经中所说:诸比丘,如果比丘希望“愿同梵行者喜爱我、中意我、敬重我、视我为应修习者”,他就应当在戒上圆满实行。巴利
Pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garukātabbatāya garu. Uttarimanussadhammavasena sambhāvetabbatāya bhāvanīyo. Sīlaguṇena vā piyagaruādibhāvā veditabbā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ – ‘‘ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ‘sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyo ca assaṃ manāpo ca garu ca bhāvanīyo cā’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.65).
被称为“说者”,是因为他把“适时而说”等五种法放在自己身上,站在为了救拔同梵行者的立场上而说。“能接受别人的话”,是指不管同梵行者怎样说他,他都能温和受教,以恭敬接受的心态容忍他们的话,所以叫能接受别人的话。或者,“说者”是指以说法为习惯的人。“能接受别人的话”,是指他在赞叹法时,不被别人所动摇,能够忍受他们的提问和话语,所以叫能接受别人的话。“能作甚深之论”,是指能说四谛、缘起等甚深之法,或者能说其他甚深之论。“不把人引到不适当的地方”,是指不依非法、非律等来说,而只依法、依律等来阐明,所以不会把人引到不适当的地方。巴利
Vattāti ‘‘kālena vakkhāmī’’tiādipañcadhamme attani upaṭṭhāpetvā sabrahmacārīnaṃ ullumpanabhāve ṭhatvā vattā. Vacanakkhamoti sabrahmacārīhi yena kenaci vuccamāno subbaco hutvā padakkhiṇaggāhitāya tesaṃ vacanaṃ khamatīti vacanakkhamo. Vattāti vā dhammakathāvasena vacanasīlo. Vacanakkhamoti dhammaṃ saṃvaṇṇento parehi asaṃhīro hutvā tesaṃ pucchāvacanakkhamatāya vacanakkhamo. Gambhīrañca kathaṃ kattāti saccapaṭiccasamuppādādiṃ, aññaṃ vā gambhīrakathaṃ kattā. Na caṭṭhāne niyojakoti dhammavinayādiṃ adhammāvinayādivasena avatvā dhammavinayādivaseneva dīpanato na ca aṭṭhāne niyojako.
这里“杀母、杀父”的意思是:按照“渴爱生出人”这句话,渴爱在三有中生出众生,所以叫“母”。因为依靠父亲,才会生起“我是某某国王或某某大臣的儿子”这种我慢,所以我慢叫“父”。就像世间人依附国王一样,一切恶见都依附常见和断见这两种见解,所以常见和断见这两种叫“两位刹帝利王”。十二处因为具有广泛展开的意义,像国土一样,所以叫“国土”。依止于它的喜贪,就像负责收税的差役一样,叫“随从”。巴利
Mātaraṃ pitaraṃ hantvāti ettha ‘‘taṇhā janeti purisa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.55-57) vacanato tīsu bhavesu sattānaṃ jananato taṇhā mātā nāma. ‘‘Ahaṃ asukassa nāma rañño, rājamahāmattassa vā putto’’ti pitaraṃ nissāya asmimānassa uppajjanato asmimāno pitā nāma. Loko viya rājānaṃ yasmā sabbadiṭṭhigatāni dve sassatucchedadiṭṭhiyo bhajanti, tasmā sassatucchedadiṭṭhiyo dve khattiyā rājāno nāma. Dvādasāyatanāni vitthataṭṭhena raṭṭhasadisattā raṭṭhaṃ nāma. Āyasādhako āyuttakapuriso viya taṃnissito nandirāgo anucaro nāma.
“无恼”就是没有痛苦。“婆罗门”就是漏已尽的人。因为他用阿拉汉道智之剑,已经把渴爱等烦恼斩断、排除掉了。所以那个婆罗门成为没有痛苦的人,继续前行。巴利
Anīghoti niddukkho. Brāhmaṇoti khīṇāsavo. Etena hi taṇhādayo arahattamaggañāṇāsinā hatā bāhitā. Yātīti so brāhmaṇo niddukkho hutvā yātīti.
所谓“身”,就是业所生的身体。所谓“心”,就是作为基础禅那的禅那心。“融合”就是投入。当他想以大家看得见的身体行走时,就决意让随身而行于身体的基础禅那心,这就是它的意思。再说“于心融入身”:当他想快速行走时,就把身体投入基础禅那心中,决意让身体随心动,这就是它的意思。“入于身中乐想与轻想”:就像力气大的人弯曲已伸的手臂或伸展已曲的手臂那样,有神通的人入于身中乐想与轻想之后,以众人看得见的身体,观看园林、美景等,只在一念之间就到达想去的地方。巴利
Kāyeti karajakāye. Cittanti pādakajjhānacittaṃ. Samodahatīti pakkhipati. Yadā dissamānena kāyena gantukāmo hoti, tadā kāyagatikaṃ pādakajjhānacittaṃ adhiṭṭhahatīti attho. Cittepi kāyaṃ samodahatīti yadā sīghaṃ gantukāmo hoti, tadā pādakajjhānacitte kāyaṃ pakkhipati, cittagatikaṃ kāyaṃ adhiṭṭhahatīti attho. Kāye sukhasaññañca lahusaññañca okkamitvāti ‘‘seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṃ vā bāhaṃ pasāreyya, pasāritaṃ vā bāhaṃ samiñjeyyā’’ti vuttanayena (mahāva. 8, 137; dī. ni. 2.66; ma. ni. 1.282; 2.338; saṃ. ni. 1.172) iddhimā kāye sukhasaññañca lahusaññañca okkamitvā paresaṃ dissamānena kāyena ārāmarāmaṇeyyakādīni pekkhamāno cittakkhaṇeneva icchitaṭṭhānaṃ gacchati.
所谓“出世间智”,这是因为它超越并胜过一切世间而安住,才这样说的,并不是因为它属于出世间的层次。所谓“一切时生起”,这是因为它随着心的转向而生起,才这样说的,并不是说它持续不断地生起。因为世尊的一切知智并不是在一切时候都生起,所以不能这样说。巴利
Yaṃ taṃ lokuttaraṃ ñāṇanti sabbaṃ lokaṃ uttaritvā abhibhavitvā ṭhitattā vuttaṃ, na pana lokuttarabhūmikattā. Sabbakāle pavattatīti āvajjanapaṭibaddhavuttittā vuttaṃ, na satataṃ samitaṃ pavattatīti. Na hi sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ bhagavato sabbasmiṃyeva kāle uppajjatīti sakkā vattunti.
我会为你宣说寂静——作为一切烦恼止息之因,我将为你开示寂静,也就是涅槃。关于“于现法”:是指在当下可见的苦等诸法上,或者就在这个自身当中。关于“非传说”:意思是说,这不是靠“据说是这样”的传闻而流传的,而是自己亲身证知的,这就是这里的意思。以“一切行无常”等方式,了知之后,保持正念而行,通过圣道了知那寂静。于世间度越渴爱:对于行世间中四处蔓延、被称为 visattikā 的 taṇhā,应当度越、应当超越,这就是这里的意思。巴利
Kittayissāmi te santinti sabbakilesavūpasamahetutāya santiṃ nibbānaṃ dassessāmi. Diṭṭhe dhammeti diṭṭhe dukkhādidhamme, imasmiṃ eva vā attabhāve. Anītihanti itihāsāti evaṃ na itikirāya pavattaṃ, attapaccakkhanti attho. Yaṃ viditvā sato caranti ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā’’tiādinā (dha. pa. 277; theragā. 676; netti. 5) nayena sato hutvā caranto ariyamaggena yaṃ santiṃ viditvā. Tare loke visattikanti saṅkhāraloke visappanato visattikasaṅkhātaṃ taṇhaṃ tare tareyya samatikkameyyāti attho.
多答迦说:“我欢喜那个”,意思是:我希求你所宣说的那种彰显寂静的话,我也同样欢喜、随喜那最上的寂静本身。“上方、下方、横向以及中间”:这里“上方”指未来和上方;“下方”指过去和下方;“横向以及中间”指现在和周围。了知这一点,就是“贪著”:意思是知道这未来等是生起贪著的地方。“为了有有”:是为了大大小小的各种有,或者是为了常见和断见。巴利
Tañcāhaṃ abhinandāmīti taṃ vuttappakāraṃ santijotakaṃ tumhākaṃ vacanaṃ ahaṃ patthayāmi, taṃ eva vā santiṃ uttamaṃ abhinandāmīti dhotako vadati. Uddhaṃ adho tiriyañcāpi majjheti ettha uddhanti anāgataṃ upari ca. Adhoti atītaṃ heṭṭhā ca. Tiriyañcāpi majjheti paccuppannaṃ parito ca. Etaṃ viditvā saṅgotīti etaṃ anāgatādiṃ saṅgajananaṭṭhānanti ñatvā. Bhavābhavāyāti khuddakānañceva mahantānañca bhavānaṃ atthāya, sassatucchedāya vā.
圣谛,就是能让人成就圣者境界的真理。未现观,是因为不觉悟、不了知。未证悟,是因为没有以智慧彻底通达。流转,是因为从这一有到那一有地行进,所以叫流转。轮回,是因为一再地反复行进,所以叫轮回。我与你们的,就是我和你们。或者说,流转、轮回的意思,就是我和你们的流转、轮回曾经发生。有爱,就是能把人引向种种有的渴爱之绳。已萦缠,就是已经缠缚而轮回。已根除,就是彻底断除、斩断,令它不再生起。巴利
Ariyasaccānanti ariyabhāvakarānaṃ saccānaṃ. Ananubodhāti abujjhanena ajānanena. Appaṭivedhāti appaṭivijjhanena. Sandhāvitanti bhavato bhavassa gamanena sandhāvitaṃ. Saṃsaritanti punappunaṃ gamanavasena saṃsaritaṃ. Mamañceva tumhākañcāti mayā ceva tumhehi ca. Atha vā sandhāvitaṃ saṃsaritanti sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ mamañceva tumhākañca ahosīti attho. Bhavanettīti bhavābhavaṃ nayanasamatthā taṇhārajju. Saṃsitanti saṃsaritaṃ. Samūhatāti suṭṭhu hatā chinnā appavattikatā.
一切行都是无常的:因为被各种条件造作出来,所以叫“行”,也就是五蕴。从有始有终、有终尽、只是暂时存在、刹那即灭这些方面来看,它们不是恒常的,所以叫“无常”。当以智慧观见时:就是当以观慧看见的时候。那时,对这股轮回之苦生起厌离;因为厌离,就通过遍知苦等方式证悟诸谛。这就是清净之道:也就是按所说的方式证悟诸谛,这就是通向清净的道路。一切行都是苦:一切行因为不断逼迫、以及坏灭,所以是苦。其余部分和前面所说的一样。一切法都是无我:一切三界之法,因为是他者、空虚、空无、无实质、不受主宰,所以是无我。其余部分和前面一样。巴利
Sabbe saṅkhārā aniccāti paccayehi saṅkharīyantīti ‘‘saṅkhārā’’ti laddhanāmā pañcakkhandhā. Ādiantavantato aniccantikato tāvakālikato khaṇaparittato ca na niccāti aniccā. Yadā paññāya passatīti yadā vipassanāpaññāya passati. Atha imasmiṃ vaṭṭadukkhe nibbindati, nibbindanto dukkhaparijānanādivasena saccāni paṭivijjhati. Esa maggo visuddhiyāti yvāyaṃ vuttanayena saccappaṭivedho, esa visuddhatthāya maggo. Sabbe saṅkhārā dukkhāti sabbe saṅkhārā abhiṇhasampaṭipīḷanaṭṭhena khayaṭṭhena ca dukkhāti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Sabbe dhammā anattāti sabbepi tebhūmakadhammā parato tucchato suññato asārato avasavattanato ca anattāti. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva.
“胜”就是更殊胜、最上等。“等”就是相同、一样。“劣”就是低劣。而“卑下”这种心态,其实也是通过贬低自己、以执取的方式生起的,所以才说“我是劣的”。除了不如实照见,还能有什么别的原因呢?色法本身就是坏灭的,其本质绝对无法安住;对于这样的色法,生起“我是胜”“我是等”之类抬高自己的想法,除了因为不如实照见它们、处于无知之外,还能有什么别的原因呢?意思是,绝没有其他原因。受等诸蕴也是如此。反过来,善的那一面应当这样了知。巴利
Seyyoti visiṭṭho uttamo. Sadisoti samāno. Hīnoti lāmako. Omānopi hi attano avaṅkaraṇamukhenapi saṃpaggaṇhanavaseneva pavattati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘hīnohamasmī’’ti. Kimaññatra yathābhūtassa adassanāti sarasapabhaṅgutāya ekanteneva anavaṭṭhitasabhāvehi rūpadhammehi seyyādivasena attano ukkhipanassa tesaṃ yathābhūtaṃ adassanaṃ aññāṇaṃ vinā kiṃ aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ siyā, aññaṃ kiñci kāraṇaṃ tassa natthīti attho. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo. Vuttavipariyāyena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
凡是能令圣谛显现的人,就是以智慧的光明,摧毁遮蔽圣谛的烦恼黑暗,让苦谛等圣谛自己清清楚楚地显露出来。所谓“具甚深慧者”,是因为智慧无法衡量,即使连同天神在内的整个世间,也无法用知识去测度、安立他的智慧深度,所以这里说的就是拥有一切知智的佛陀。所谓“善说”,是通过略说、广说等各种方式善巧开示的法。即使那些人可能极为放逸,意思是:这些已令圣谛显现的人,虽然可能因为遇到天王位、转轮王位等容易让人放逸的境遇,而显得非常放逸;然而,由于在证得入流道智时,作为轮回推动力的行作识已经灭尽,除了剩下的七有之外,在无始轮回中本应生起的名色,因为已经灭尽,他们不会再执取第八有,只会在第七有中着手修观,证得阿罗汉果。这就是这里的意思。巴利
Ye ariyasaccāni vibhāvayantīti dukkhādīni ariyasaccāni paññāobhāsena saccappaṭicchādakakilesandhakāraṃ vidhametvā attano pakāsāni pākaṭāni karonti. Gambhīrapaññenāti appameyyapaññatāya sadevakassapi lokassa ñāṇena alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhapaññena sabbaññunāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sudesitānīti saṅkhepavitthārādīhi tehi tehi nayehi suṭṭhu desitāni. Kiñcāpi te honti bhusaṃ pamattāti te vibhāvitaariyasaccā puggalā kāmaṃ devarajjacakkavattirajjādipamādaṭṭhānaṃ āgamma bhusaṃ pamattā honti, tathāpi sotāpattimaggañāṇena abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa nirodhena ṭhapetvā satta bhave anamatagge saṃsāre ye uppajjeyyuṃ nāmañca rūpañca, tesaṃ niruddhattā na aṭṭhamaṃ bhavaṃ ādiyanti, sattamabhaveyeva pana vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇantīti attho.
“犹如因陀罗柱”这句话里,“犹如”是表示譬喻的说法。“因陀罗柱”是指为了加固城门,在门闩横木中间挖地八肘或十肘深,然后打进去的那根坚木柱子的名称。“倚立于地”是说因为根基深厚,深入地下之后倚立在大地上。“四风所吹”是指从四个方向吹来的风。“不可摇动”是说无法被摇撼或动摇。如此譬喻……凡是能以智慧深入观照四圣谛的人,由于他的见与这根柱子相似,我就说那位善士、那位上人是如同前面所说的因陀罗柱一般;因为他如实明见的缘故,不会被一切外道议论之风所动摇。这就是这里的意思。巴利
Yathindakhīloti ettha yathāti upamāvacanaṃ. Indakhīloti nagaradvārathirakaraṇatthaṃ ummārabbhantare aṭṭha vā dasa vā hatthe pathaviṃ khaṇitvā ākoṭitassa sāradārumayassa thambhassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Pathavissito siyāti gambhīranemitāya anto pavisitvā bhūminissito siyā bhaveyya. Catubbhi vātehīti catūhi disāhi āgatavātehi. Asampakampiyoti kampetuṃ vā cāletuṃ vā asakkuṇeyyo. Tathūpamaṃ…pe… passatīti yo cattāri ariyasaccāni paññāya ajjhogāhetvā passati, taṃ sappurisaṃ uttamapurisaṃ tathā dassanato sabbatitthiyavādavātehi asampakampiyatāya tathūpamaṃ yathāvuttaindakhīlūpamaṃ vadāmīti attho.
以“预流支”来说,就是以成为圣者入流之组成部分的那些法。圣弟子,是指在圣者佛陀、世尊面前听闻正法而生起,所以是圣弟子。“我已断尽地狱”,就是我已经灭尽地狱。“已断尽苦界、恶趣、堕落处”,这只是地狱等名称的另一种说法而已。地狱等之所以叫“苦界”,是因为远离了称为增长的吉祥;是苦的去处和归宿,所以叫“恶趣”;造恶业的人被强制性地堕落其中,所以叫“堕落处”。最初证得、进入圣道之流,就是入流者。由于道果的法性不可动摇,不会堕入凡夫状态这类凡夫性中,其本性如此,所以是“不退堕法”。正因为如此,由法性自然决定而成为定当成就者,所以是“决定者”。因为必定要证得以上三道所摄的正觉,以正觉作为最终的归趣和去处,所以是“以正觉为归宿”。巴利
Sotāpattiyaṅgehīti ariyasotāpajjanassa aṅgabhūtehi. Ariyasāvakoti ariyassa buddhassa bhagavato saddhammassavanante jātattā ariyasāvako. Khīṇanirayomhīti khīṇanirayo amhi. Khīṇāpāyaduggativinipātoti idaṃ nirayādīnaṃyeva vevacanavasena vuttaṃ. Nirayādayo hi vaḍḍhisaṅkhātato ayato apetattā apāyā. Dukkhassa gati paṭisaraṇanti duggatiyo. Dukkaṭakārino vivasā ettha nipatantīti vinipātā. Sotaṃ ariyamaggaṃ ādito patto adhigatoti sotāpanno. Akuppadhammatāya maggaphalānaṃ puthujjanabhāvasaṅkhāte virūpe na nipatanasabhāvoti avinipātadhammo. Tato eva dhammaniyāmena niyatatāya niyato. Uparimaggattayasaṅkhātā sambodhi avassaṃ pattabbatāya assa paraṃ ayanaṃ gati paṭisaraṇanti sambodhiparāyaṇo.
安住等词,彼此都是同义词。同法者,是指一起修梵行的同修。圣所喜,是指被圣者们所喜爱、所中意、所可意。五戒对圣弟子们来说确实是可爱的,因为即使转生到别的生命状态中也不会舍弃它们。这段话就是针对这个说的。不过,在这里一切防护也都是能得到的。我是入流者,这只是教说的开头。一来者等也同样以我是一来者这样的方式来做记说。因为只要不与学处相违背,在适当的场合,一切记说都是被允许的。巴利
Niviṭṭhātiādīni padāni aññamaññavevacanāneva. Sahadhammiyāti sabrahmacārino. Ariyakantehīti ariyānaṃ kantehi piyehi manāpehi. Pañca sīlāni hi ariyasāvakānaṃ kantāni honti, bhavantarepi avijahanato. Tāni sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Sabbopi panettha saṃvaro labbhatiyeva. Sotāpannohamasmīti idaṃ desanāsīsameva. Sakadāgāmiādayopi ‘‘sakadāgāmīhamasmī’’tiādinā nayena byākarontiyeva. Yato sabbesampi sikkhāpadāvirodhena yuttaṭṭhāne byākaraṇaṃ anuññātamevāti.
对于“诸根”这句:是指某位圣者的信等诸根。“善修习”:是依圣道的修习而善加修习。“于内、于外”:是为了断除下分结和上分结。因此说“于一切世界”。“洞彻”:就是穿透、通达。巴利
Yassindriyānīti yassa ariyapuggalassa saddhādīni indriyāni. Subhāvitānīti ariyamaggabhāvanāvasena suṭṭhu bhāvitāni. Ajjhattaṃ bahiddhā cāti orambhāgiyānaṃ uddhambhāgiyānañca saṃyojanānaṃ pajahanavasena. Tenāha ‘‘sabbaloke’’ti. Nibbijjhāti nibbijjhitvā paṭivijjhitvā.
“法句”是指法的分类。所谓“无贪法句”,就是无贪,或者以无贪为主导而证得的禅那、观、道、果、涅槃,又或者以十种不净而证得的禅那等,这些就是无贪法句。以四种梵住而证得的,是无嗔法句。以十随念和食厌想而证得的,是正念法句。以十遍和入出息念而证得的,是正定法句。巴利
Dhammapadānīti dhammakoṭṭhāsāni. Anabhijjhā dhammapadaṃ nāma alobho vā alobhasīsena adhigatajhānavipassanāmaggaphalanibbānāni vā dasaasubhavasena vā adhigatajhānādīni anabhijjhā dhammapadaṃ. Catubrahmavihāravasena adhigatāni abyāpādo dhammapadaṃ. Dasānussatiāhārepaṭikkūlasaññāvasena adhigatāni sammāsati dhammapadaṃ. Dasakasiṇaānāpānavasena adhigatāni sammāsamādhi dhammapadaṃ.
用刀砍断五样东西:砍断那五种会让人投生到恶道去的下分结,就像有人用刀砍断绑在脚上的绳子一样,以三道来砍断。舍弃五样东西:舍弃那五种能让人投生到上方天界的上分结,就像有人砍断绑在脖子上的绳子一样,以阿罗汉道来舍弃,也就是断除的意思。更进一步修习五样东西:为了断除上分结,应当进一步修习信等五根。超越五种束缚:这样一来,超越了贪、嗔、痴、慢、见这五种束缚,成为超越五缚的比丘,就被称为“渡过瀑流的人”,也就是渡过了四种瀑流的人,这就是它的含义。巴利
Pañca chindeti heṭṭhā apāyupapattisaṃvattanikāni pañca orambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni pāde baddharajjuṃ viya puriso satthena heṭṭhā maggattayena chindeyya. Pañca jaheti uparidevalokasampāpakāni pañca uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni puriso gīvāya baddharajjuṃ viya arahattamaggena jaheyya chindeyyevāti attho. Pañca cuttari bhāvayeti uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanānaṃ pahānatthāya saddhādīni pañcindriyāni uttari bhāveyya. Pañca saṅgātigoti evaṃ sante pañcannaṃ rāgadosamohamānadiṭṭhisaṅgānaṃ atikkamanena pañcasaṅgātigo hutvā bhikkhu ‘‘oghatiṇṇo’’ti vuccati, nittiṇṇacaturoghoti vuccatīti attho.
对还没了知、还没证通的四圣谛法,或者对“我要了知、要证知不死之境”而修行的人——也就是初道位者——来说,这种根就叫“未知当知根”。初道智其实是就它之前那个阶段来说的。以初道所了知的范围,不超出这个界限而了知,就叫“已知”,这种根叫“已知根”,这是指下面三个果位以及上面三个道位中的智。对四圣谛已经了知、已经完成所作之事的阿罗汉来说,这种根叫“具知根”,这是指最高果智。所谓“未证悟”,就是未通达。“为证悟”,就是为了通达。巴利
Anaññātaṃ appaṭividdhaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ, amatapadaṃyeva vā ñassāmi jānissāmīti paṭipannassa paṭhamamaggaṭṭhassa indriyanti anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ. Paṭhamamaggañāṇañhi taṃpubbabhāgavasena evaṃ vuttaṃ. Ājānāti paṭhamamaggena ñātamariyādaṃ anatikkamitvā jānātīti añño, tassa indriyanti aññindriyaṃ, heṭṭhā tīsu phalesu, upari tīsu maggesu ca ñāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Aññātāvino catūsu saccesu niṭṭhitakiccassa arahato indriyanti aññātāvindriyaṃ, aggaphalañāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Anabhisametassāti appaṭividdhassa. Abhisamayāyāti paṭivedhāya.
愚者相,是指愚者的显著特征和原因。愚者征,是指用来认定“这是愚者”的征象和原因。愚者迹,是指愚者过去累积、已经形成的种种行为。“恶思者”等说法中,反复思量贪欲、嗔恚和邪见,就是恶思者;说妄语等不善的话,就是恶言者;做杀生等恶业,就是恶行者。反过来,善的一面也应当这样理解。巴利
Bālalakkhaṇānīti bālassa upalakkhaṇakāraṇāni. Bālanimittānīti ‘‘bālo aya’’nti gahetuṃ nimittāni kāraṇāni. Bālāpadānānīti bālassa porāṇāni viruḷhāni kammāni. ‘‘Duccintitacintī’’tiādīsu duccintitaṃ abhijjhaṃ byāpādaṃ micchādassanañca cintetīti duccintitacintī. Dubbhāsitaṃ musāvādādiṃ bhāsatīti dubbhāsitabhāsī. Dukkaṭaṃ pāṇātipātādikammaṃ karotīti dukkaṭakammakārī. Vuttavipariyāyena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
“更甚”是指一次比一次更严重。“应被激怒”是指应当产生对抗。也有写成“应发怒”的读法。“以猛烈”是指以强力。“以杖”是指施以杖罚。“智者”是指有智慧的人、具慧的种类。“制止”是指挡住、阻止。意思是:让他再也没有能力做任何事或说任何话。巴利
Bhiyyoti uparūpari. Pakujjheyyunti virujjheyyuṃ. ‘‘Pakuppeyyu’’ntipi pāṭho. Bhusenāti daḷhena. Daṇḍenāti daṇḍadānena. Dhīroti paṇḍito sappaññajātiko. Nisedhayeti paṭibāheyya. Puna kiñci kātuṃ vattuṃ vā asamatthaṃ kareyyāti attho.
所谓“他者”,就是敌对的人。“有念而平息”是说:具足正念之后而平息。对于那平息者,我认为制止愚者就是平息本身。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Paranti paccatthikaṃ. Yo sato upasammatīti yo satimā hutvā upasammati, tassa upasamaṃyevāhaṃ bālassa paṭisedhanaṃ maññāmīti attho.
「嗔怒」指的是嗔怒。当他把它当成自己的,是因为他这样认为。「欺凌」就是压迫、欺压。就像牛群中两头牛正在角斗时,整群牛会站在旁边看着,直到有一头逃跑;一旦有一头跑了,整群牛就会更加凶猛地追压那头逃跑的牛。同样,愚笨的人对忍让的人,反而会更加欺凌。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Vajjanti dosaṃ. Yadā naṃ maññatīti yasmā naṃ maññati. Ajjhāruhatīti ajjhottharati. Gova bhiyyo palāyinanti yathā goyūthe tāvadeva dve gāvo yujjhante gogaṇo olokento tiṭṭhati yāva na eko palāyati, yadā pana palāyati, atha taṃ palāyīnaṃ sabbo gogaṇo bhiyyo ajjhottharati, evaṃ dummedho khamantaṃ bhiyyo ajjhottharatīti attho.
把“自己的利益”当作最高目标,就是把自身利益放在第一位。在那些把自身利益放在最高位置的人当中,没有比忍耐更殊胜的利益了。所以他们说:忍耐是最高的。一个真正有力量的人能够忍受,他们就说那种忍耐是最高的。所谓愚人的力量,其实就是无知的力量。谁拥有这种力量,那其实不是力量,他们说那不是力量,并这样讲说、开示。“法守护者”:指被法守护的人,或者守护法的人。“回骂”:指被骂之后就骂回去,或者别人用什么话绕转地说时,同样绕转地说回去。然而,能够动摇安住于法的人,是不存在的。“他因此更糟”:因为那嗔怒,那个人的恶就属于他自己。“谁的?”若有人对发怒者回怒,那就是他的。其中“对发怒者”:这是与格中表目的的说法,意思是“对发怒的人”。“治疗者们”:单数中用了复数,意思是“治疗者”。“人们认为”:如此治疗、成办自己和他人的利益,即两者的利益,愚痴凡夫对这样的人就这样认为:“这是愚人。” “那些对法不精通的人”:指对四圣谛法不精通、不娴熟的人,他们就这样认为,这是意思。巴利
Sadatthaparamāti sakatthaparamā. Khantyā bhiyyo na vijjatīti tesu sakatthaparamesu atthesu khantito uttaritaro añño attho na vijjati. Tamāhu paramaṃ khantinti yo balavā titikkhati, tassa taṃ khantiṃ paramaṃ āhu. Bālabalaṃ nāma aññāṇabalaṃ. Taṃ yassa balaṃ, abalameva taṃ, na taṃ balanti āhu kathenti dīpenti. Dhammaguttassāti dhammena rakkhitassa dhammaṃ vā rakkhantassa. Paṭivattāti paṭippharitvā vattā, paṭipparitvā vā yaṃ vā taṃ vā vadeyyāsi. Dhammaṭṭhaṃ pana cāletuṃ samattho nāma natthi. Tasseva tena pāpiyoti tena kodhena tasseva puggalassa pāpaṃ hoti. Katarassāti ? Yo kuddhaṃ paṭikujjhati, tassa. Tattha kuddhanti sampadāne upayogavacanaṃ, kuddhassāti attho. Tikicchantānanti ekavacane bahuvacanaṃ, tikicchantanti attho. Janā maññantīti evarūpaṃ attano ca parassa cāti ubhinnaṃ atthaṃ tikicchantaṃ nipphādentaṃ puggalaṃ ‘‘bālo aya’’nti andhabālaputhujjanā evaṃ maññanti. Ye dhammassa akovidāti ye catusaccadhamme akovidā acchekā, te evaṃ maññantīti attho.
已获得的,是指现在已得到、正在享受的欲乐资具;应当获得的,是指未来应当得到、应当享受的同样东西。这两者都被贪欲等尘垢所沾染。为烦恼所逼恼的人,是指被贪等烦恼所逼恼的人。随学,是指跟随烦恼深重的人学习。那些以修学为核心的人,是指把按照自己所受持的戒与禁戒行等修学,执取为核心而安住的人。因此说:戒、禁戒行、活命、梵行。其中,心想我不做而退避不犯的,就是戒;关于衣着、食物、行为、行仪等,就是禁戒行;活命指谋生方式;梵行指远离淫欲。以近住修行为核心的人,是指以这些戒等的持续实践为核心的人。他们以为靠这些就能使轮回清净,意思是他们把那些执取为核心而安住。巴利
Pattanti adhigataṃ etarahi anubhuyyamānaṃ kāmūpakaraṇaṃ pattabbanti tadeva anāgate adhigantabbaṃ anubhavitabbaṃ, ubhayametaṃ rajānukiṇṇanti tadubhayampi rāgarajādīhi avakiṇṇaṃ . Āturassāti rāgādikilesāturassa. Anusikkhatoti kilesabahulapuggale anusikkhato. Ye ca sikkhāsārāti ye yathāsamādinnaṃ sīlavatādisaṅkhātaṃ sikkhaṃ sārato gahetvā ṭhitā. Tenāha – ‘‘sīlaṃ vataṃ jīvitaṃ brahmacariya’’nti. Tattha yaṃ ‘‘na karomī’’ti oramati, taṃ sīlaṃ. Yaṃ vesabhojanakiccacaraṇādi, taṃ vataṃ. Jīvitanti ājīvo. Brahmacariyanti methunavirati. Upaṭṭhānasārāti etesaṃ sīlādīnaṃ anuṭṭhānasārā. Etehi eva saṃsārasuddhīti tāni sārato gahetvā ṭhitāti attho.
这两个极端就是:通过执取戒禁来修自我折磨的苦行,以及通过把欲乐看成没有过失来放纵享乐——这就是两个极端。而这两个极端,依次是由那些执著于将来会得到的和现在已经得到的、夹杂着贪欲等尘垢的种种欲乐的人,跟随那些被烦恼折磨的人学习,自己也跟着被烦恼折磨的人去修行。正因如此,他们就成了不断增长尸林的人,一生又一生地在老死中让尸林不断扩张,必定要把尸林越堆越大。不但自己增长,还劝别人也在这两个极端中增长。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Iccete ubho antāti iti sīlabbataparāmāsamukhena attakilamathānuyogo, kāmesu anavajjasaññitāmukhena kāmasukhallikānuyogo cāti ete ubho antā. Te ca kho yathākkamaṃ āyatiṃ pattabbe, etarahi patte ca rāgarajādiokiṇṇe kāmaguṇe allīnehi kilesāturānaṃ anusikkhantehi, sayañca kilesātureheva paṭipajjitabbā, tato eva ca te kaṭasivaḍḍhanā aparāparaṃ jarāmaraṇehi sivathikāya vaḍḍhanasīlā ekanteneva kaṭasiṃ vaḍḍhenti, sayaṃ vaḍḍhantā pare ca antadvaye samādapentā vaḍḍhāpenti cāti attho.
不了知这两种极端,就是不明白上面所说的两种极端。有些人沉滞不前:某些人被“我与世间是常”这种沉滞的渴爱和执取所束缚,因此停滞、执著于其中。有些人则过度奔逸:某些人抱着“我与世间是断灭、坏灭”这种过度偏执,因此越过中道,奔逸到另一个极端。巴利
Ubho ante anabhiññāyāti yathāvutte ubho ante ajānitvā. Olīyanti eketi ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti olīyanataṇhābhinivesavasena avalīyanti ekacce. Atidhāvanti eketi ekacce – ‘‘ucchijjati vinassati attā ca loko cā’’ti atidhāvanābhinivesavasena atikkamanti.
他们不这样认为,是因为他们的渴爱等执取已经被彻底断除了。正因如此,由于无取般涅槃,对他们来说,三种轮回的安立根本不存在。巴利
Naamaññiṃsu tesañca taṇhādimaññanānaṃ pahīnattā. Tato eva anupādāparinibbānato tividhampi vaṭṭaṃ tesaṃ paññāpanāya natthīti.
应知,就是应当知道。应结合,就是应当结合。属于人类的,就是人类的;也就是属于人类生存范围的。当众生正走进死神的嘴里时,除了善业以外,还有什么能真正算是他自己的呢?因为众生确实是业的所有者。所以他说“因此应当行善”等等。其中,能产生来世果报的,就是“有关来世的”。巴利
Jaññāti jāneyya. Saṃyujeti saṃyojeyya. Mānusanti manussānaṃ idanti mānusaṃ, manussabhavapariyāpannaṃ. Kiñhi tassa sakaṃ hotīti tassa maccumukhaṃ pavisantassa sattassa kiṃ aññaṃ sakaṃ nāma aññatra kalyāṇakammato. Kammassakā hi sattā. Tenāha – ‘‘tasmā kareyya kalyāṇa’’ntiādi. Tattha samparāyikanti samparāyaphalanibbattakaṃ.
这些法,就是指这些善的或不善的法。这样被执取,就是指这样被领受、被生起。这是果,就是指可意的果报和不可意的果报。这是义,意思就是这是增长、这是衰退。还有“同此类”的说法,他这是在说应一向记说。巴利
Ime dhammāti ime kusalā vā akusalā vā dhammā. Evaṃgahitāti evaṃ samādinnā uppāditā. Idaṃ phalanti idaṃ iṭṭhavipākaṃ aniṭṭhavipākañca phalaṃ. Ayamatthoti ayaṃ vuḍḍhi, ayaṃ hānīti attho. Aññampi evaṃjātiyanti ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyaṃ vadati.
对于期望者不应知道,这里的意思是:世尊有什么期望,那是其他人不能了知的领域,所以说:“世尊期望什么?这个问题是不应被回答的。”巴利
Ākaṅkhato na jāneyyunti tattha yena hetunā bhagavato yā ākaṅkhā, sā aññesaṃ avisayoti āha – ‘‘kintaṃ bhagavā ākaṅkhatīti. Idaṃ avisajjanīya’’nti.
这么多,就是指这个数量。以戒蕴为因,就是由戒蕴而来。也有写成“以戒蕴”的读法。其余几句也是同样的道理。以威仪,是指身和语的行为。以威力,是指大威神力。以利益求,是指以慈爱。以神通,是指种种神通变化。这些就是佛陀的功德,而且每一项都各自有这样的威力。同样地,道、果和涅槃也有这样的威神力。圣僧伽就是与这样一类功德相应的。巴利
Ettakoti etaparimāṇo. Sīlakkhandheti sīlakkhandhahetu. ‘‘Sīlakkhandhenā’’tipi pāṭho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Iriyāyanti kāyavacīsamācāre. Pabhāveti ānubhāve. Hitesitāyanti mettāya. Iddhiyanti iddhividhāya. Ettakā buddhaguṇā, te ca paccekaṃ evaṃpabhāvā. Tathā maggaphalanibbānāni evamānubhāvāni. Ariyasaṅgho evaṃvidhaguṇehi yuttoti.
三宝具有大威力,这一点并不是其他任何人能在一切方面都了知的领域,它只是世尊的领域,所以说“佛陀的领域是不应解释的”。这里所说的“不可知”,是指“不成为他人智识的领域”,因此又说:“不可知,是因为声闻的智有欠缺”等等。由此也表明:凡是其他属于佛陀领域的道理,也都是不应解释的。世尊确实这样说过:“佛陀的领域不可思议、不应思维,谁去思维它,就会陷入迷乱和苦恼。”(《增支部》4.77)“过去的最初点是什么”,这是不应解释的,意思是:无论谁问“过去的最初点是什么”,都不应回答。为什么?因为轮回没有最初的点。因此世尊说:“诸比丘,最初点不可知。”(《增支部》10.61)其中,“不可知”即不见,也就是不可得的意思。对于“不可知”,若依“不成为他人智识的领域”这一含义,则说“不可知,是因为声闻的智有欠缺”等等。其中,“引入于自身”即应把自身引入此中,故为“引入于自身”。“诸佛世尊无不知”,以此表明:正因为没有最初点,所以不可知,并非在那里有智的障碍。巴利
Tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ mahānubhāvatā na sabbathā aññesaṃ visayo, bhagavato eva visayoti āha – ‘‘buddhavisayo avisajjanīyo’’ti. Tena yo aññopi attho buddhavisayo, so avisajjanīyoti dasseti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘buddhavisayo acinteyyo na cintetabbo, yaṃ cintento ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assā’’ti (a. ni. 4.77). Katamā pubbā koṭīti avisajjanīyanti ‘‘katamā pubbā koṭī’’ti kenaci kataṃ pucchanaṃ avisajjanīyaṃ. Kasmā? Saṃsārassa purimāya koṭiyā abhāvato. Tenevāha – ‘‘purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 10.61). Tattha na paññāyatīti na dissati, na upalabbhatīti attho. Na paññāyatīti aññassa ñāṇavisayo na hotīti pana atthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘na paññāyatīti sāvakānaṃ ñāṇavekallenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha attūpanāyikāti attā upanetabbo etissāti attūpanāyikā. Natthi buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ avijānanāti etena purimāya koṭiyā abhāvato eva na paññāyati, na tattha ñāṇassa paṭighātoti dasseti.
然而,凡是存在的,即使对别人来说无法衡量,对世尊来说却并非无法衡量。为了显示世尊在一切处都无障碍的智慧,他说:“就像世尊针对拘迦利比丘……”等等。这里,“某位比丘”是指姓名不详的比丘。有一位比丘坐下来问:“尊者,莲花地狱的寿命有多长?”世尊就对这位比丘这样说了。这里省略的内容是:“比丘,莲花地狱的寿命很长,不容易计算成‘多少年’、‘多少百年’、‘多少千年’或‘多少十万年’。”“尊者,能打个比方吗?”“能,比丘。”世尊说,“比丘,譬如有一辆能装二十迦利芝麻的憍萨罗芝麻车。如果有人每过一百年从里面取走一粒芝麻,比丘,这辆装满二十迦利芝麻的憍萨罗芝麻车,用这种方式反而会更快地取完、耗尽,而一个阿浮陀地狱却绝不可能这样结束。比丘,好比二十个阿浮陀地狱才等于一个尼罗浮陀地狱……”等等。巴利
Yaṃ pana atthi, taṃ aññesaṃ appameyyampi bhagavato na appameyyanti bhagavato sabbattha appaṭihataññāṇataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā bhagavā kokālikaṃ bhikkhuṃ ārabbhā’’tiādimāha. Tattha aññataraṃ bhikkhunti nāmagottena apākaṭaṃ. ‘‘Kīva dīghaṃ nu kho, bhante, padume niraye āyuppamāṇa’’nti pañhaṃ pucchitvā nisinnaṃ ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ evamāhāti. Etthāyaṃ pāṭhaseso – dīghaṃ kho, bhikkhu, padume niraye āyuppamāṇaṃ, taṃ na sukaraṃ saṅkhātuṃ ‘‘ettakāni vassānī’’ti vā ‘‘ettakāni vassasatānī’’ti vā ‘‘ettakāni vassasahassānī’’ti vā ‘‘ettakāni vassasatasahassānī’’ti vāti. Sakkā pana, bhante, upamā kātunti. ‘‘Sakkā bhikkhū’’ti bhagavā avoca. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhu, vīsatikhāriko kosalako tilavāho. Tato puriso vassasatassa vassasatassa accayena ekamekaṃ tilaṃ uddhareyya. Khippataraṃ kho so, bhikkhu, vīsatikhāriko kosalako tilavāho iminā upakkamena parikkhayaṃ pariyādānaṃ gaccheyya, na tveva eko abbudo nirayo. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhu, vīsati abbudā nirayā, evameko nirabbudo nirayotiādi (saṃ. ni. 1.181; a. ni. 10.89; su. ni. kokālikasutta).
这里,“二十迦利芝麻车”是这么算的:按摩揭陀的度量制,四钵陀等于憍萨罗国的一钵陀。以这个钵陀来算,四钵陀是一阿罗迦,四阿罗迦是一多那,四多那是一摩尼迦,四摩尼迦是一迦利。按这个迦利来算,就是二十迦利的芝麻车。“芝麻车”就是芝麻车。“阿浮陀地狱”并不是另外单独有一个叫阿浮陀的地狱,而是在无间地狱里,按阿浮陀的计数方式来算,把那一段称为“阿浮陀地狱”。尼罗浮陀等也是同样的道理。巴利
Tattha vīsatikhārikoti māgadhakena patthena cattāro patthā kosalaraṭṭhe eko pattho hoti. Tena patthena cattāro patthā āḷhakaṃ, cattāri āḷhakāni doṇaṃ, catudoṇā mānikā, catumānikā khārī. Tāya khāriyā vīsatikhāriko tilavāho. Tilavāhoti tilasakaṭaṃ. Abbudo nirayoti abbudo nāma eko paccekanirayo natthi, avīcimhi eva pana abbudagaṇanāya paccanokāso ‘‘abbudo nirayo’’ti vutto. Esa nayo nirabbudādīsupi.
在这里,年数的计算也应当这样理解:比如一百个十万是一俱胝。这样,一百个十万俱胝叫做一帕俱胝。一百个十万帕俱胝叫做一俱胝帕俱胝。一百个十万俱胝帕俱胝叫做一那由他。一百个十万那由他叫做一尼那由他。一百个十万尼那由他叫做一阿浮陀。二十个阿浮陀是一尼罗浮陀。一切处都依此类推。因为这种计算对不熟悉的人来说非常困难,所以经中说“不容易计算”。不过有些人说:“由于在那些地狱中各处悲叹的方式不同,以及业因的差别,才得到了这些名称。”另一些人说:“这些是寒地狱。”使心生恚,意思是使心染污。巴利
Tattha vassagaṇanāpi evaṃ veditabbā – yathā hi sataṃsatasahassāni koṭi hoti. Evaṃ sataṃsatasahassakoṭiyo pakoṭi nāma. Sataṃsatasahassapakoṭiyo koṭipakoṭi nāma. Sataṃsatasahassakoṭipakoṭiyo nahutaṃ. Sataṃsatasahassanahutāni ninnahutaṃ. Sataṃsatasahassāni ninnahutāni eko abbudo. Tato vīsatiguṇo nirabbudo. Esa nayo sabbattha. Ayañca gaṇanā aparicitānaṃ dukkarāti vuttaṃ – ‘‘taṃ na sukaraṃ saṅkhātu’’nti. Keci pana ‘‘tattha tattha paridevanānattena kammakāraṇanānattenapi imāni nāmāni laddhānī’’ti vadanti. Apare ‘‘sītanarakā ete’’ti. Cittaṃ āghātetvāti cittaṃ padūsetvā.
“怎样是胜者?”是问方式。“以什么而是胜者?”是问原因。他问的是:以什么原因、什么理由、什么样的修行方式而是胜者?而问“怎样”时,他问的是:以什么方式?是断除过去的烦恼而成为胜者,还是断除未来或现在的烦恼而成为胜者?因此,这被称为“应当回答的”。“谁是胜者?”是问:什么是胜者?是色是胜者,还是受、想、行、识是胜者?或者是脱离色等之外另有别的胜者,即那个被称为“我”的?正是针对这个意思,才说“不应当回答的”。“多少?”是从数量方面问:有多大数量。巴利
Kathaṃ jinoti pakārapucchā. Kena jinoti kāraṇapucchā. Kena kāraṇena kena hetunā kāya paṭipattiyā jinoti pucchati. Kathanti pana kena pakārena kiṃ atītānaṃ, udāhu anāgatānaṃ paccuppannānaṃ kilesānaṃ pahānena jinoti pucchati, tasmā taṃ ‘‘visajjanīya’’nti vuttaṃ. Katamo jinoti kiṃ rūpaṃ jino, udāhu vedanā saññā saṅkhārā viññāṇaṃ jino. Rūpādivinimutto vā añño jino, yo ‘‘attā’’ti vuccatīti imamatthaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘avisajjanīya’’nti. Kittakoti pamāṇato kiṃparimāṇo.
“有如来”的意思是“有众生”。这位具寿是依着五蕴才被施设称为“有这样的名、有这样的姓”,因为指的就是这样一个补特伽罗,所以说是“应当回答的”。“色是如来”的意思是,他是带着有身见来问“色就是我”,因此说是“不应当回答的”。按照这个方法,一切句子中的含义都应当这样理解。巴利
Atthitathāgatoti atthi satto. Yvāyamāyasmā ‘‘evaṃnāmo evaṃgotto’’ti pañcakkhandhe upādāya paññapīyati, tassa puggalassa adhippetattā vuttaṃ ‘‘visajjanīya’’nti. Rūpaṃ tathāgatoti rūpaṃ attāti sakkāyadiṭṭhivasena pucchatīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘avisajjanīya’’nti. Iminā nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo.
愚人登上座席等说法,是用属格来表达所属关系。以身行恶行,就是以身做下恶劣的事。依附,就是悬挂、覆盖。剩下两个词是它的同义词。因为它们以悬挂等方式显现出来,所以才这样说。大,指大的东西的。在地上依附,就是铺展在地面上。剩下两个词是它的同义词。那正是铺展的方式。对此,比丘们,对于愚人,当以那种显现方式出现时,愚人就这样。巴利
Bālaṃ pīṭhasamāruḷhantiādīni sāmiatthe upayogavacanāni. Kāyena duccaritānīti kāyena duṭṭhu katāni. Olabbhantīti avalambanti avatthariyanti. Sesapadadvayaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Olambanādiākārena hi tāni upaṭṭhahanti, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Mahatanti mahantānaṃ. Pathaviyaṃ olambantīti pathavitale pattharanti. Sesapadadvayaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Pattharaṇākāroyeva hesa. Tatra, bhikkhave, bālassāti tasmiṃ upaṭṭhahanākāre bālassa evaṃ hoti.
比丘们,你们所得到的这些人身、信心等收获,是你们的收获,确实是收获。所谓“善得”,是说出家之后成就了四遍清净戒等,那也是善得。所谓“你们得到了时机”,是说远离八种无暇,这第九种时机已经得到,可以用来修习道与梵行。接着用“我已见”等说法,举出部分例子,来说明八种无暇。巴利
Lābhāvo, bhikkhaveti bhikkhave, ye ime tumhehi paṭiladdhā manussattasaddhāpaṭilābhādayo, lābhā vo tumhākaṃ lābhā eva. Suladdhanti yampidaṃ pabbajitvā catupārisuddhisīlādisampādanaṃ laddhaṃ, tampi suladdhaṃ. Khaṇo vo paṭiladdhoti aṭṭhaakkhaṇavajjito navamoyaṃ khaṇo paṭiladdho maggabrahmacariyavāsāya. ‘‘Diṭṭhā mayā’’tiādinā ekadesanidassanena aṭṭha akkhaṇe vibhāveti.
无论他去往哪一种恶趣,就是说他无论投生到哪一处恶道。所谓非法,就是他所实行的非法行为,那个非法作用于行非法的人。杀害:就是伤害。巴利
Yahiṃ yahinti yaṃ yaṃ duggatiṃ yo gacchati. So naṃ adhammoti yo adhammo tena carito, so naṃ adhammacāriṃ puggalaṃ. Hanātīti bādhati.
缺乏名望,就是没有威力。相貌丑陋,就是长得难看、令人厌恶。没有智慧,就是没有慧力,因为是无因结生,所以像哑巴一样愚钝。巴利
Appesakkhatāti appānubhāvatā. Dubbaṇṇatāti virūpatā bībhacchatā. Duppaññatāti nippaññatā ahetukapaṭisandhivasena eḷamūgatā.
守护语言,就是通过避免四种语言上的恶行来守护语言。不产生贪欲等,就是以心意好好地防护。舍弃杀生等行为,不以身体做不善的事,应当净化这三种业道。因为这样净化的人,就能成就由寻求戒蕴等的佛陀等仙人开示的圣八支道。没有恶作,就是没有以身、语、意所做的有罪过的、招致苦果的、导致堕入恶趣的业。以三种方式防护,就是通过这三种途径阻止身恶行等进入而封闭,我称这样的人为婆罗门。巴利
Vācānurakkhīti catunnaṃ vacīduccaritānaṃ parivajjanena vācānurakkhī. Abhijjhādīnaṃ anuppādanena manasā suṭṭhu saṃvuto. Pāṇātipātādayo pajahanto kāyena ca akusalaṃ na kayirā, ete tayo kammapathe visodhaye. Evaṃ visodhento hi sīlakkhandhādīnaṃ esakehi buddhādīhi isīhi paveditaṃ ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ ārādheyyāti. Dukkaṭanti kāyena vācāya manasā ca dukkaṭaṃ sāvajjaṃ dukkhudrayaṃ duggatisaṃvattaniyaṃ kammaṃ yassa natthi. Saṃvutaṃ tīhiṭhānehīti etehi tīhi kāraṇehi kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ pavesanivāraṇato pihitaṃ, taṃ ahaṃ ‘‘brāhmaṇa’’nti vadāmīti.
彻底无戒,就是完全处于无戒的状态。在家人从出生开始就造作十种不善业道,或者出家人从受具足戒那天起就犯下重罪,这就叫彻底无戒。但这里说的是在两三个生命形态中都无戒的人,是针对他从过去世带来的无戒状态而说的。这里所说的无戒状态,应当理解为无戒者依靠六根门生起的渴爱。如蔓藤缠覆婆罗树,意思是说,对那个人而言,那种被称为渴爱的无戒状态。就像蔓藤缠覆了婆罗树,下雨时叶子挡住雨水,然后以绞缠破坏的方式到处完全包住它,同样,那人的自身被缠覆、被完全包住之后,就像那棵树被蔓藤绞断而倒在地上一样,这个人被那种叫作无戒的渴爱绞断后,堕入恶趣。也就是说,就像想害他的敌人所希望的那样,他把自己变成了那样。巴利
Accantadussīlyanti ekantadussīlabhāvo. Gihī vāpi jātito paṭṭhāya dasa akusalakammapathe karonto, pabbajito vāpi upasampannadivasato paṭṭhāya garukāpattiṃ āpajjamāno accantadussīlo nāma. Idha pana yo dvīsu tīsu attabhāvesu dussīlo, tassa gatiyā āgataṃ dussīlabhāvaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Dussīlabhāvoti cettha dussīlassa cha dvārāni nissāya uppannā taṇhā veditabbā. Māluvā sālamivotthatanti yassa puggalassa taṃ taṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ dussīlyaṃ. Yathā nāma māluvā sālaṃ otthataṃ deve vassante pattehi udakaṃ paṭicchitvā saṃbhañjanavasena sabbatthakameva pariyonandhati, evaṃ attabhāvaṃ otthataṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhitaṃ so māluvāya saṃbhañjitvā bhūmiyaṃ pātiyamāno rukkho viya tāya dussīlyasaṅkhātāya taṇhāya saṃbhañjitvā apāyesu pātiyamāno, yathā naṃ anatthakāmo diso icchati, tathā attānaṃ karoti nāmāti attho.
“自己所作的”这首偈颂,简要的意思是:就像一块石头所生的金刚石,也就是从石头里出来的宝石,它把自己所出生的那块石头——也就是被称为“生处”的宝石原石——咬得坑坑洼洼、碎成一块块,让它没法再用;同样地,一个人自己造作、从自身生起、源于自身的恶,会在四种恶趣中折磨、切割、摧毁那个愚笨、没有智慧的人。巴利
‘‘Attanā hi kata’’nti gāthāya ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – yathā pāsāṇamayaṃ pāsāṇasambhavaṃ vajiraṃ tameva asmamayaṃ maṇiṃ attano uṭṭhānaṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ pāsāṇamaṇiṃ khāyitvā chiddāchiddaṃ khaṇḍākhaṇḍaṃ katvā aparibhogaṃ karoti, evamevaṃ attanā kataṃ attani jātaṃ attasambhavaṃ pāpaṃ dummedhaṃ nippaññaṃ puggalaṃ catūsu apāyesu abhimatthati kantati viddhaṃsetīti.
“习近”是指已经造作。“应呵责”是指应当被呵责。“愚慧”是指智慧迟钝的人。“由于业尽”,是指凭借能令业灭尽的智慧,使业被舍弃。“心解脱”,是指因为断除的解脱和止息的解脱而心得解脱。“他们熄灭,如火焰因燃料尽而熄灭”:就像没有执取的火焰熄灭一样,同样地,由诸行所生的识无余灭尽而熄灭。巴利
Niseviyāti katvā. Garahāti gārayhā. Bālamatīti mandabuddhino. Khayā ca kammassāti kammakkhayakarañāṇena kammassa khepanato. Vimuttacetasoti samucchedavimuttiyā paṭippassaddhivimuttiyā ca vimuttacitto. Nibbanti te jotirivindhanakkhayāti yathā nāma anupādāno jātavedo nibbāyati, evamevaṃ abhisaṅkhārassa viññāṇassa anavasesakkhayā nibbāyati.
在“如蜜蜂”这个偈颂里,“蜜蜂”是指任何一种酿蜜的蜂类。“花”的意思是:它在花园里飞的时候,不伤害、不损害、不破坏花以及花的颜色和香气。这样飞过之后,它带着蜜离开:喝够了花蜜,又为了继续酿蜜而取走一些蜜,然后飞走。它进入一片密林,把混着花粉的蜜放在树洞等处,渐渐酿成甘甜的蜜。花园里的花、花的颜色和香气,并不会因为它来飞过就消失,花还是保持原样。同样,“如是,牟尼应于村中行”:有学或无学的出家牟尼,按家户的顺序在村里乞食而行。信心和财富并不会因为他在村里行乞而减少,信心和财富还是保持原样。这样行过之后,离开村子,在村外有水且方便的地方铺好僧伽梨衣坐下,按车轴涂油、疮药、子肉这三种比喻来观察,然后受用团食;之后进入那样的丛林,把内在的业处拿来作意观察,使道与果就像拿在手里一样现前。无学的牟尼则致力于现法安乐住。这就是他与酿蜜蜂相似的地方。这里所说的,是漏已尽的人。巴利
‘‘Yathāpi bhamaro’’ti gāthāyaṃ bhamaroti yā kāci madhukarajāti. Pupphanti pupphārāme caranto pupphañca tassa vaṇṇañca gandhañca aheṭhayaṃ aheṭhayanto avināsento caratīti attho. Evaṃ caritvā ca paleti rasamādāyāti yāvadatthaṃ rasaṃ pivitvā aparampi madhukaraṇatthāya rasaṃ gahetvā ḍeti. So ekaṃ vanagahanaṃ ajjhogāhetvā rukkhasusirādīsu taṃ rajamissakaṃ rasaṃ ṭhapetvā anupubbena madhurarasaṃ madhuṃ karoti, na tassa pupphārāme caritapaccayā pupphaṃ vā tassa vaṇṇo vā gandho vā vinassati, atha kho pupphaṃ pākatikameva hoti. Evaṃ gāme munī careti evaṃ sekkho asekkho vā anagāriyamuni kulapaṭipāṭiyā gāme bhikkhaṃ gaṇhanto careyyāti attho. Na hi tassa gāme caraṇapaccayā saddhāhāni vā bhogahāni vā hoti, saddhāpi bhogāpi pākatikāva honti. Evaṃ caritvā ca pana gāmato nikkhamitvā bahigāme udakaphāsukaṭṭhāne saṅghāṭiṃ paññapetvā nisinno akkhabhañjana- (mi. pa. 6.1.2) vaṇalepanaputtamaṃsūpamavasena (mi. pa. 6.1.2; saṃ. ni. 2.63) paccavekkhanto piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjitvā tathārūpaṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ anupavisitvā ajjhattikakammaṭṭhānaṃ sammasanto maggaphalāni hatthagatāneva karoti. Asekkhamuni pana diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāramanuyuñjati. Ayamassa bhamarena madhukarena sarikkhatā. Khīṇāsavo panettha adhippetoti.
他安住在波罗提木叉律仪的守护中。所谓“波罗提木叉”,意思是:谁能守护他、保护他,使他从地狱等苦中解脱出来,这就叫波罗提木叉。这波罗提木叉本身,因为能防护、遮止身体和语言上的违犯,所以叫律仪。他具足了这波罗提木叉律仪的守护,在一切行住坐卧的威仪中行动。“戒行与行处具足”,就是戒行也具足,行处也具足。“于微细”指在极细小的地方。“罪过”指不善法。“见怖畏”就是对那些微细的罪过也能看到其中的危险。“于学处受持而学”,就是对诸学处中凡是应当学的,全都正确地受持而学习。巴利
Pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharatīti yo naṃ pāti rakkhati, taṃ mokkheti moceti āpāyikādīhi dukkhehīti pātimokkho. So eva kāyikavācasikassa vītikkamassa saṃvaraṇato pidahanato saṃvaro. Tena pātimokkhasaṃvarena saṃvuto samannāgato hutvā sabbiriyāpathesu carati. Ācāragocarasampannoti ācārena ca gocarena ca sampanno. Aṇumattesūti appamattakesu. Vajjesūti akusaladhammesu. Bhayadassāvīti bhayaṃ dassī. Samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesūti sikkhāpadesu yaṃ kiñci sikkhitabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ sammā ādiyitvā sikkhati.
具足善的身业和语业、活命清净:在这里,虽然通过“戒行与行处具足”已经包含了善的身业和语业,但因为这条活命遍净戒并不是在虚空之类的地方生起的,而只是在身门和语门中生起,所以为了显示它生起的门径,才说“具足善的身业和语业”。又因为此人具足了这些,所以是活命清净者;为了显示活命遍净本身就是戒,才这样说。这也有经文为证:“木匠啊,什么是善戒?善的身业、善的语业,木匠啊,我说活命清净也是戒。”(《中部·木匠经》2.265)。“勤修精进者”:凡有身精进与心精进已发起者,彼被称为“勤修精进者”。其中,若有人除去群体聚会,在四种威仪中依八种发勤之事而独处,他的身精进便名为已发起。若有人除去心之聚会,依八种等至而独处,在行走等时于生起烦恼之处即予抑制,令禅那生起,他的心精进便名为已发起。如是即“勤修精进者”。“有力者”:即稳固者。“坚毅者”:即坚定坚毅者。“不弃责任……证得”:为了断除杂染法、成就清净法、作证,不舍弃责任,勤修精进而住。“具慧者”:具足于五蕴的生灭随观之慧。因此说“于生灭随观”。巴利
Kāyakammavacīkammena samannāgato, kusalena parisuddhājīvoti ettha ācāragocaraggahaṇeneva kusale kāyakamme vacīkamme ca gahitepi yasmā idaṃ ājīvapārisuddhisīlaṃ na ākāsādīsu uppajjati, kāyavacīdvāresu eva pana uppajjati, tasmā tassa uppattidvāradassanatthaṃ ‘‘kāyavacīkammena samannāgato, kusalenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana tena samannāgato, tasmā parisuddhājīvo, ājīvapārisuddhipi sīlamevāti dassanatthaṃ etaṃ vuttaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘katame ca thapati kusalā sīlā? Kusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ kusalaṃ vacīkammaṃ, parisuddhaṃ ājīvampi kho ahaṃ thapati sīlasmiṃ vadāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.265). Āraddhavīriyoti yassa kāyikaṃ cetasikañca vīriyaṃ āraddhaṃ hoti, so ‘‘āraddhavīriyo’’ti vuccati. Tattha yo gaṇasaṅgaṇikaṃ vinodetvā catūsu iriyāpathesu aṭṭhaārambhavatthuvasena ekako hoti, tassa kāyikaṃ vīriyaṃ āraddhaṃ nāma hoti. Yo cittasaṅgaṇikaṃ vinodetvā aṭṭhasamāpattivasena ekako hoti, gamanādīsu uppannakilesaṃ uppannaṭṭhāneyeva niggaṇhitvā jhānaṃ nibbatteti, tassa cetasikaṃ vīriyaṃ āraddhaṃ nāma hoti. Evaṃ āraddhavīriyo. Thāmavāti ṭhitimā. Daḷhaparakkamoti thiraparakkamo. Anikkhittadhuro…pe… sacchikiriyāyāti saṃkilesadhammānaṃ pahānatthaṃ vodānadhammānaṃ sampādanatthaṃ , paccakkhakaraṇatthañca dhuraṃ anikkhipitvā vīriyaṃ ussukkāpento viharati. Paññavāti pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ udayabbayapariggāhikāya paññāya samannāgato. Tenāha ‘‘udayatthagāminiyā’’ti.
没有一种爱能比得上对儿子的爱。父母就算自己的孩子长得丑,也会把他当成金像一样,当成花环一样,放在头上等地方细心照顾。即使被孩子的大小便弄脏了,他们也像接受涂香一样,心里欢喜。因此说“没有一种爱能比得上对儿子的爱”。意思是说,没有任何爱能和对儿子的爱相等。没有一种财富能比得上牛。意思是说,除了牛以外,没有任何别的财富能跟牛群相比。没有一种光明能比得上太阳的光明。意思是说,没有任何别的光明能跟太阳的光明相比。以大海为最上。意思是说,无论还有什么别的湖泊,全都以大海为最上,大海是它们当中最高的;没有任何水的聚集能跟大海相比。世尊是这样说的。巴利
Natthi puttasamaṃ pemanti mātāpitaro virūpepi attano puttake suvaṇṇabimbakaṃ viya maññanti mālāguḷe viya sīsādīsu katvā pariharamānā. Tehi uhaditāpi omuttitāpi gandhavilepanaṃ paṭicchantā viya somanassaṃ āpajjanti. Tenāha – ‘‘natthi puttasamaṃ pema’’nti. Puttapemena samaṃ pemaṃ nāma natthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Gosamitanti gohi samaṃ godhanasadisaṃ aññaṃ dhanaṃ nāma natthi. Sūriyasamā ābhāti sūriyābhāya samā aññā ābhā nāma natthi. Samuddaparamāti ye keci aññe sarā nāma, sabbe te samuddaparamā. Samuddo tesaṃ uttamo, samuddasadisaṃ aññaṃ udakaṃ nidānaṃ nāma natthi bhagavāti vadati.
不过,再没有哪种爱能比得上对自己的爱。父母就算丢下儿女、不养他们,也还是会养活自己。也没有哪种财富能比得上粮食。因为到了那种时候,为了拿到粮食,连金银、牛、水牛之类的东西,人们都会带着去粮食主人那里。也没有哪种光明能比得上智慧。太阳等只能照亮一个地方,也只能驱散当下的黑暗;而智慧却能照亮一万个世界,还能消除遮蔽过去、未来等的黑暗。也没有哪个湖泊能比得上降雨。不管是河流还是湖泊,都没有能跟降雨相比的。因为一旦降雨停了,大海里连一个指节高的水都不会有;可要是雨一直下,连光音天都会变成一片汪洋。所以,世尊为了驳斥天人的话,说出答偈:“没有与爱自己相等的爱”等等。巴利
Yasmā pana attapemena samaṃ pemaṃ natthi. Mātāpitaro hi chaḍḍetvāpi puttadhītaro aposetvā attānameva posenti. Dhaññena ca samaṃ dhanaṃ nāma natthi. Tathārūpe hi kāle hiraññasuvaṇṇādīnipi gomahiṃsādīnipi dhaññaggahaṇatthaṃ dhaññasāmikānameva santikaṃ gahetvā gacchanti. Paññāya ca samā ābhā nāma natthi. Sūriyādayo hi ekadesaṃyeva obhāsenti, paccuppannameva ca tamaṃ vinodenti, paññā pana dasasahassimpi lokadhātuṃ ekapajjotaṃ kātuṃ sakkoti, atītaṃsādipaṭicchādakañca tamaṃ vidhamati. Meghavuṭṭhiyā ca samo saro nāma natthi. Nadī vā hi hotu taḷākādīni vā, vuṭṭhisamo saro nāma natthi. Meghavuṭṭhiyā hi pacchinnāya mahāsamudde aṅgulipabbatemanamattampi udakaṃ na hoti, vuṭṭhiyā pana pavattamānāya yāva ābhassarabhavanāpi ekodakaṃ hoti. Tasmā bhagavā devatāvacanaṃ paṭikkhipanavasena paṭigāthaṃ vadanto ‘‘natthi attasamaṃ pema’’ntiādimāha.
“到底怕什么?”就是问:究竟为什么害怕?道被说成有许多种依据,是依三十八种所缘,以许多理由说道。既然如此,这些人是因为怕什么,才执取了六十二种见解呢?这样说。“广慧”:就是智慧多、智慧增盛。“不害怕他世”:从这个世界前往他世时,不应害怕。巴利
Kiṃsūdha bhītāti kiṃ nu bhītā. Maggo canekāyatano pavuttoti aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇavasena anekehi kāraṇehi maggo kathito, evaṃ sante kissa bhītā hutvā ayaṃ janatā dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo aggahesīti vadati. Bhūripaññāti bahupañña ussannapañña. Paralokaṃ na bhāyeti imasmā lokā paralokaṃ gacchanto na bhāyeyya.
“发愿”是指立定、安置。“住在家里”是指像给孤独长者等人那样,住在饮食丰足的家中。“能分享者”是指即使是用手抓来的食物,也会用指甲掰开先分给别人,然后自己才吃的习惯。“了知言说者”是指通过乞求者的乞求而了解他们所说的话,或者指值得被劝说的人。在这里,“语”包含了四种善语业,“意”包含了三种善意业,“身”包含了三种善身业——这十种善业道叫做“前清净支”。“饮食丰足而住在家里”这句话,包含了祭祀的资具。“有信”是一支,“柔和”是一支,“能分享”是一支,“了知言说”是一支,为了说明这四种法,所以说“住在这四种法中”。巴利
Paṇidhāyāti ṭhapetvā. Gharamāvasantoti anāthapiṇḍikādayo viya bahvannapāne ghare vasanto. Saṃvibhāgīti accharāya gahitampi nakhena phāletvā parassa datvāva bhuñjanasīlo. Vadaññūti yācakānaṃ yācanavasena vuttavacanaññū, vacanīyo vā. Ettha ca vācanti cattāri vacīsucaritāni gahitāni. Mananti tīṇi manosucaritāni. Kāyenāti tīṇi kāyasucaritāni. Ime dasa kusalakammapathā pubbasuddhiaṅgaṃ nāma. ‘‘Bahvannapānaṃ gharamāvasanto’’ti iminā yaññaupakkharo gahito. Saddhoti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ, mudūti ekaṃ, saṃvibhāgīti ekaṃ, vadaññūti ekanti imāni cattāri aṅgāni sandhāya ‘‘etesu dhammesu ṭhito catūsū’’ti āha.
另一种分法:“语”等三项是三支;用“饮食丰足”这句,指的是祭祀的用具本身;“有信、柔和、乐于分享、善解人意”合为一支。巴利
Aparo nayo – ‘‘vāca’’ntiādīni tīṇi aṅgāni, ‘‘bahvannapāna’’nti iminā yaññaupakkharova gahito, ‘‘saddho mudu saṃvibhāgī vadaññū’’ti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ.
还有一种叫“二支法”的说法:把“语和意”算作一支,把“不以身作恶、多受用饮食而居家”算作一支,把“有信、柔和”算作一支,把“乐于分享、懂得感恩”算作一支。安住在这四种法里的人,就叫作住于法。他从这个世界去往另一个世界时,不会害怕。巴利
Aparo dukanayo nāma hoti – ‘‘vācaṃ manañcā’’ti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ, ‘‘kāyena pāpāni akubbamāno bahvannapānaṃ gharamāvasanto’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘saddho mudū’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘saṃvibhāgī vadaññū’’ti ekanti etesu catūsu dhammesu ṭhito dhamme ṭhito nāma hoti. So ito paralokaṃ gacchantona bhāyati.
“身行”等是说明巴帝摩卡防护。其中,“以两种”即由两种方式,意思是分为两类。“应知”即应当了知。而所谓的“戒论”,应依业道而说,或依施设而说。若依业道来说,不应修习的身行,当以杀生、不与取、邪淫来说明;若依施设来说,则当以违犯身门所施设的学处来说明。应修习的身行,当以远离杀生等,以及不违犯身门所施设的学处来说明。巴利
Kāyasamācārampītiādi pātimokkhasaṃvaradassanaṃ. Tattha duvidhenāti dvividhena, dvīhi koṭṭhāsehīti attho. Jaññāti jāneyya. Sīlakathā ca nāmesā kammapathavasena vā paṇṇattivasena vā kathetabbā. Tattha kammapathavasena tāva kathentena asevitabbakāyasamācāro pāṇātipātādinnādānamicchācārehi kathetabbo. Paṇṇattivasena kāyadvāre paññattasikkhāpadavītikkamavasena. Sevitabbakāyasamācāro pāṇātipātādiveramaṇīhi ceva kāyadvāre paññattasikkhāpadaavītikkamena ca kathetabbo.
不应修习的语行,要从妄语等语恶行和违犯语门所制定的学处这两方面来说明。应修习的语行,要从远离妄语等和不再违犯语门所制定的学处这两方面来说明。巴利
Asevitabbavacīsamācāro musāvādādivacīduccaritena ceva vacīdvāre paññattasikkhāpadavītikkamena ca kathetabbo. Sevitabbavacīsamācāro musāvādādiveramaṇīhi ceva vacīdvāre paññattasikkhāpadaavītikkamena ca kathetabbo.
说到寻求,它只是通过身和语来进行的寻求。虽然它已经被包含在对身体行为和言语行为的持守当中,但因为被称为活命第八戒的戒只在这两个门中生起,不在虚空中生起,所以为了显示活命第八戒,另外单独说了它。其中,不应亲近的寻求应当用非圣寻求来说明,应当亲近的寻求应当用圣寻求来说明。经中确实这样说:“诸比丘,什么是非圣寻求?在这里,诸比丘,有一类人自己具有生的法性,却只寻求具有生的法性的事物……”以及:“诸比丘,什么是圣寻求?在这里,诸比丘,有一类人自己具有生的法性,了知具有生的法性的过患之后,寻求无生、无上、轭安稳的涅槃……”巴利
Pariyesanā pana kāyavācāhi pariyesanā eva, sā kāyavacīsamācāraggahaṇena gahitāpi yasmā ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ nāma etasmiṃyeva dvāradvaye uppajjati, na ākāse, tasmā ājīvaṭṭhamakasīladassanatthaṃ visuṃ vuttā. Tattha nasevitabbapariyesanā anariyapariyesanāya kathetabbā, sevitabbapariyesanā ariyapariyesanāya. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘katamā ca, bhikkhave, anariyapariyesanā? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco attanā jātidhammo samāno jātidhammaṃyeva pariyesatī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.274). Tathā ‘‘katamā ca, bhikkhave, ariyapariyesanā? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco attanā jātidhammo samāno jātidhamme ādīnavaṃ viditvā ajātaṃ anuttaraṃ yogakkhemaṃ nibbānaṃ pariyesatī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.275).
八支道:无论是腿脚走的路这类世间道路,还是六十二种恶见之路,对于所有这一切道路来说,八支道以正见等八支,断除邪见等八种恶法,以灭为所缘,在四圣谛中完成遍知苦等作用,所以是最上、最殊胜的。
四谛之句:无论是《法句经》224颂“应说真实语,不应发怒”所说的言语真实,还是“真实的婆罗门、真实的刹帝利”等类的世俗谛,或是“只有这是真实,其他是虚妄”的见谛,或是《经集》等所说的“真实只有一个,没有第二个”的究竟谛,在这一切真实当中,具有应遍知、应断、应证、应修、同一证悟、如实证悟等意义的“苦圣谛”等四句,称为最胜。
离欲是诸法中最上:如《增支部》等所说:“比丘们,无论有为法或无为法,离欲是其中之最上。”根据这句话,称为涅槃的离欲,是一切法中最上。
两足者中,具眼者最胜:在一切天、人等种类的两足者中,具足五眼的世尊最为殊胜。巴利
Maggānaṭṭhaṅgikoti jaṅghamaggādayo vā hontu dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatamaggā vā, sabbesampi maggānaṃ sammādiṭṭhiādīhi aṭṭhahi aṅgehi micchādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ pahānakaro nirodhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā catūsupi saccesu dukkhaparijānanādikiccaṃ sādhayamāno aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo seṭṭho uttamo. Saccānaṃ caturo padāti ‘‘saccaṃ bhaṇe na kujjheyyā’’ti (dha. pa. 224) āgataṃ vacīsaccaṃ vā hotu, ‘‘sacco brāhmaṇo, sacco khattiyo’’tiādibhedaṃ sammutisaccaṃ vā, ‘‘idameva saccaṃ moghamañña’’nti (ma. ni. 3.331; udā. 54; mahāni. 20) diṭṭhisaccaṃ vā, ‘‘ekañhi saccaṃ na dutiyamatthī’’ti (su. ni. 890; mahāni. 119) vuttaṃ paramatthasaccaṃ vā hotu. Sabbesampi imesaṃ saccānaṃ parijānitabbaṭṭhena pahātabbaṭṭhena sacchikātabbaṭṭhena bhāvetabbaṭṭhena ekapaṭivedhaṭṭhena tathapaṭivedhaṭṭhena ca ‘‘dukkhaṃ ariyasacca’’ntiādayo (mahāva. 14; dī. ni. 2.387; ma. ni. 1.120) caturo padā seṭṭhā nāma. Virāgo seṭṭho dhammānanti ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṃ dhammānaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34; 5.32; itivu. 90) vacanato nibbānasaṅkhāto virāgo sabbadhammānaṃ seṭṭho. Dvipadānañca cakkhumāti sabbesampi devamanussādibhedānaṃ dvipadānaṃ pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā bhagavāva seṭṭhoti.
“最上”是指最高的。“所有”是指一切。“无足”是指没有脚的,比如蛇、鱼之类。“两足”是指人和鸟这类。“四足”是指象、马之类。“多足”是指百足虫之类。“有色”是指欲界和色界的有情。“无想”是指投生到无想天的有情。“非想非非想”是指投生到有顶天的有情。“被称为最上”是说,因为功德而被称为最高、最上、最殊胜。巴利
Aggānīti uttamāni. Yāvatāti yattakā. Apadāti nippadā ahimacchādayo. Dvipadāti manussapakkhijātādayo. Catuppadāti hatthiassādayo . Bahuppadāti satapadiādayo. Rūpinoti kāmāvacararūpāvacarasattā. Asaññinoti asaññībhave nibbattasattā. Nevasaññīnāsaññinoti bhavagge nibbattasattā. Aggamakkhāyatīti guṇehi aggo uttamo seṭṭho akkhāyati.
“无为”说的就是涅槃。“离贪”等这些也都是涅槃的名称。因为依靠涅槃,一切烦恼都会离染,一切贪、迷醉等迷醉都不再迷醉,归于消失;一切渴爱都被调伏;一切执著都被彻底根除;轮回被切断;渴爱耗尽;一切热恼止息;轮回之苦熄灭、寂灭。因此,涅槃就得到这些名称。巴利
Asaṅkhatānanti nibbānameva vuttaṃ. Virāgotiādīni ca nibbānasseva nāmāni. Tañhi āgamma sabbe kilesā virajjanti, sabbe rāgamadādayo madā nimmadā honti abhāvaṃ gacchanti , sabbā pipāsā vinayaṃ upenti, sabbe ālayā samugghātaṃ gacchanti, vaṭṭāni upacchijjanti, taṇhā khīyati, sabbapariḷāhā vūpasammanti, vaṭṭadukkhaṃ nirujjhati nibbāyati. Tasmā taṃ etāni nāmāni labhatīti.
那位导师的法是善的、无可指责的;正因为它无可指责,所以不会被贪等烦恼以及一切外道的言论所破坏。这三宝在世间胜过一切宝物,意思是,它们凭功德而超越整个世间。巴利
Dhammo ca kusalakkhatoti tassa satthuno dhammo ca kusalo anavajjo, anavajjattā eva paṭipakkhehi rāgādīhi kilesehi sabbatitthiyavādehi ca aparikkhato. Tāni tīṇi visissareti etāni tīṇi ratanāni loke sabbaratanehi visissanti guṇavasena sabbalokaṃ atisentīti attho.
沙门莲花众:就是像莲花一样的圣沙门们的团体,也就是一群圣沙门的集合。因为“莲花”是花瓣圆满的百瓣莲花的名称,而圣者们也在一切方面功德圆满,所以说他们像莲花。为智者所恭敬:就是被智者们恭敬。人中最胜的调御者:意思是人中最上者、能调伏人的人、导师。世间之上:就是安住在世间之上,意思是在一切世间中最为殊胜。巴利
Samaṇapadumasañcayo gaṇoti padumasadisānaṃ ariyasamaṇānaṃ samūhasaṅkhāto gaṇo. Padumanti hi paripuṇṇasatapattassa saroruhassa nāmaṃ. Ariyapuggalā ca sabbathāpi paripuṇṇaguṇāti padumasadisā vuttā. Vidūnaṃ sakkatoti vidūhi paṇḍitehi sakkato. Naravaradamakoti naravaro ca purisānaṃ damako nāyako cāti attho. Lokassa uttarīti lokassa upari ṭhitāni, sabbaloke uttamānīti attho.
没有贪等热恼的逼迫,就是“无恼害”。“真实名”是指名不虚妄,凭如实具足的功德而得名。“胜一切”是指以自己的功德胜过整个世间而安住。“真实法”是指从轮回中彻底出离,所以不虚妄;连同教法一起,也是九种出世间法,因此没有别的法比它更超胜。“圣僧伽”则永远、在任何时候都被智者、一切有智慧的人所恭敬。巴利
Nirupadāhoti rāgapariḷāhādīhi anupadāho. Saccanāmoti avitathanāmo yathābhuccaguṇehi āgatanāmo. Sabbābhibhūti sabbalokaṃ attano guṇehi abhibhavitvā ṭhito. Saccadhammoti vaṭṭato ekantanissaraṇabhāvena avitatho saha pariyattiyā navavidhopi lokuttaradhammo, tato eva natthañño tassa uttarīti tassa uttari adhikaguṇo añño ca dhammo natthīti attho. Ariyasaṅghova niccaṃ sabbakālaṃ vidūhi sabbapaṇḍitehi pūjito.
在“一乘道”这首偈颂里,“一乘道”指的是一条道路。因为道的——巴利
‘‘Ekāyana’’nti gāthāya ekāyananti ekaṃ maggaṃ. Maggassa hi –
道、路、途、径、直道、坦途,
船、渡桥、筏、褥、渡口。巴利
‘‘Maggo pantho patho pajjo, añjasaṃ vaṭumāyanaṃ; Nāvā uttarasetu ca, kullo ca bhisi saṅgamo’’ti. (cūḷani. pārāyanatthutigāthāniddesa 101) –
它有众多名称,但在这里是用“行道”这个名称来说的。因此,“一乘”就是唯一的道路,意思是它不是分成两条的路。或者,也可以说应当由一个人独自去走,所以叫“一乘”;意思是舍弃人群聚集,以远离的方式独自修行。或者,因为依靠它而行走,所以叫“行道”;意思是从轮回走向涅槃。或者,这是唯一者——一切众生中最殊胜的世尊——的行道,所以叫“一乘”。虽然其他人也确实通过它而行走,但这条道仍然属于世尊,因为是由他使这条道生起的。正如经中所说:“婆罗门,那位世尊确实是未生起之道的生起者”等等。或者,“行道”的意思是行走、运转。它只存在于这法和律之中,不在别处,所以叫“一乘”。正如所说:“须跋陀罗,在这法和律中,可以找到八支圣道。”另外,虽然在前期阶段以种种方式修行,但到了后期阶段,只趣向唯一的涅槃而行走,所以叫“一乘”,就是那一乘。巴利
Bahūni nāmāni, svāyaṃ idha ayananāmena vutto. Tasmā ekāyananti ekamaggaṃ, na dvedhāpathabhūtanti attho. Atha vā ekena ayitabbanti ekāyanaṃ. Gaṇasaṅgaṇikaṃ pahāya vivekaṭṭhena pavivittena paṭipajjitabbanti attho. Ayanti vā etenāti ayano, saṃsārato nibbānaṃ gacchantīti attho. Ekassa vā sabbasattaseṭṭhassa bhagavato ayanoti ekāyano. Kiñcāpi hi tena aññepi ayanti, tathāpi bhagavatova so ayano, tena uppāditattā. Yathāha – ‘‘so hi, brāhmaṇa, bhagavā anuppannassa maggassa uppādetā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 3.79). Ayatīti vā ayano, gacchati pavattatīti attho. Ekasmiṃ imasmiṃyeva dhammavinaye ayano, na aññatthāti ekāyano. Yathāha – ‘‘imasmiṃ kho, subhadda, dhammavinaye ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo upalabbhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.214). Api ca pubbabhāge nānāmukhabhāvanāya pavattopi aparabhāge ekaṃ nibbānameva ayati gacchatīti ekāyano, taṃ ekāyanaṃ.
“见生灭尽者”:以生的灭尽为终点,称为“生灭尽”;见到以生的究竟灭尽为终点的涅槃,就是“见生灭尽者”。另有一种读法是“了知道路,为利益悲悯者”,意思是:世尊以自觉智了知上述那种称为一乘的道,了知的同时,又以种种利益哀愍众生。现在,为了阐明这道的一乘性以及在三时中都决定出离的特质,所以说:“以此道,过去已渡,未来当渡,现今正在渡越瀑流。”这句话的意思是:过去已渡越欲瀑流等四种瀑流的人,未来将渡越的人,以及现在正在渡越的人,他们全都依于此道,而不是依于其他道。“希求清净者”:指通过渡越四种瀑流而希求绝对清净的涅槃的人,也就是想要般涅槃的人。巴利
Jātikhayantadassīti jātiyā khayasaṅkhāto anto jātikhayanto. Jātiyā accantakhayanto nibbānaṃ, taṃ passīti jātikhayantadassī. ‘‘Maggaṃ pajānāti hitānukampī’’tipi pāṭho. Tassattho – vuttappakāraṃ ekāyanasaṅkhātaṃ maggaṃ sayambhuñāṇena bhagavā pajānāti, jānanto ca tena tena hitena satte anukampatīti. Idāni tassa maggassa ekāyanabhāvaṃ, tīsupi kālesu ekantaniyyānatañca vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘etena maggena tariṃsu pubbe, tarissanti ye ca taranti ogha’’nti āha. Tassattho – ye atītamaddhānaṃ kāmoghādicatubbidhaṃ oghaṃ tariṃsu, ye taṃ anāgatamaddhānaṃ tarissanti, etarahi ca taranti, te sabbe eteneva maggena, na aññenāti. Visuddhipekkhāti caturoghanittharaṇena accantavisuddhiṃ nibbānaṃ apekkhantā, parinibbāyitukāmāti attho.
像这样,先用种种经句分别说明了教法的两种安立,现在为了联系杂染分等来显示,又接着提出“世间经”等话。其中,“见道分和修道分”就是指抉择分,因为抉择分正是被分成见道分和修道分这两个方面来显示的。“世间与出世间经”,意思是世间经和出世间经应当通过杂染分等以及见道分等这两类来指称。“在哪部经中……”等话,是显示指称的方式。其中,“杂染分”指与杂染相关的部分,也就是阐明杂染的含义。其余部分也应当这样理解。巴利
Evaṃ duvidhampi sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ nānāsuttapadāni udāharantena vibhajitvā idāni saṃkilesabhāgiyādīhi saṃsanditvā dassetuṃ puna ‘‘lokiyaṃ sutta’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha dassanabhāgiyena ca bhāvanābhāgiyena cāti nibbedhabhāgiyena. Nibbedhabhāgiyameva hi dassanabhāgiyaṃ bhāvanābhāgiyanti dvidhā bhinditvā dassitaṃ. Lokiyañca lokuttarañcāti lokiyaṃ lokuttarañca suttaṃ, saṃkilesabhāgiyādīhi dassanabhāgiyādīhi cāti ubhayehi niddisitabbanti adhippāyo. Yasmiṃ suttetiādi niddisanākāradassanaṃ. Tattha saṃkilesabhāgiyanti saṃkilesakoṭṭhāsasahitaṃ, saṃkilesatthadīpananti attho. Esa nayo sesesupi.
像这样,先用“杂染分”等四种说法把与世间三类的对应关系展示出来之后,再按这个方式去对应其余三类和其余各句,就很容易理解了,所以没有再单独列出来。为了说明对杂染分等的超越,就说了“习气分经”等等。在这里,虽然“杂染分经”和“习气分经”都是世间经,但为了表明:就像出世间经一样,世间经中的“习气分经”是为了超越“杂染分”,所以说“习气分经是为了断除杂染分经”。这里的“断除”就是“舍断”的意思。还要知道,这里是拿经的标题来涵盖整部经的含义。又因为,就像清净法要超越杂染法一样,修习的阶段也必须通过见道的超越才能达到,所以说“修道分经是为了舍离见道分经”。然而,当无学阶段的法已经生起时,所谓“修道”的作用就不存在了;连禅那的修习也只是为了现法安乐而住,所以说“无学分经是为了舍离修道分经,无学分经是为了现法安乐住”。巴利
Evaṃ lokiyattikassa saṃkilesabhāgiyādīhi catūhi padehi saṃsandanaṃ dassetvā iminā nayena sesatikānaṃ sesapadānañca saṃsandanaṃ suviññeyyanti taṃ anuddharitvā saṃkilesabhāgiyādīnaṃ samatikkamanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vāsanābhāgiyaṃ sutta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yadipi saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ, vāsanābhāgiyañca suttaṃ lokiyameva. Tathāpi lokuttarasuttāni viya lokiyasuttānaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyassa samatikkamāya hotīti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyassa suttassa nigghātāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha nigghātāyāti pahānāya. Suttasīsena cettha suttattho gahitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yasmā ca vodānadhammā viya saṃkilesadhammānaṃ dassanabhūmisamatikkamaneneva bhāvanābhūmi adhigantabbā, tasmā ‘‘bhāvanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ dassanabhāgiyassa suttassa paṭinissaggāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana asekkhadhammesu uppannesu maggabhāvanākiccaṃ nāma natthi. Jhānabhāvanāpi diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthā eva hoti, tasmā ‘‘asekkhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ bhāvanābhāgiyassa suttassa paṭinissaggāya, asekkhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārattha’’nti ca vuttaṃ.
现在,为了用三句的格式把它们对应起来并显示出来,所以说了“出世间”等话。在“一种子者”等当中,有人成为入流者之后,只再生一次生命,就证得阿罗汉果,这个人就叫作“一种子者”。正如所说的:巴利
Idāni tikapadeheva saṃsanditvā dassetuṃ ‘‘lokuttara’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Ekabījinātiādīsu yo sotāpanno hutvā ekameva attabhāvaṃ janetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, ayaṃ ekabījī nāma. Yathāha –
什么样的人是一种子者呢?在这里,有一类人因为彻底断除了三结,成为入流者,不再会堕入恶趣,必定走向正觉。他只在人间投生一次,就彻底结束了苦。这样的人就称为一种子者。巴利
‘‘Katamo ca puggalo ekabījī? Idhekacco puggalo tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā sotāpanno hoti avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo. So ekaṃyeva mānusakaṃ bhavaṃ nibbattetvā dukkhassantaṃ karoti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo ekabījī’’ti (pu. pa. 33).
如果有人流转经过两个或三个家之后,尽苦的边际,这个人就名为家家者。正如所说:巴利
Yo pana dve vā tīṇi vā kulāni sandhāvitvā saṃsaritvā dukkhassantaṃ karoti, ayaṃ kolaṃkolo nāma. Yathāha –
什么样的人是家家者呢?在这里,有一种人已经彻底断除了三结……(中略)……以正见为最终归宿。他在两个或三个家之间流转往来之后,就彻底结束了苦。这样的人就称为家家者。巴利
‘‘Katamo ca puggalo kolaṃkolo? Idhekacco puggalo tiṇṇaṃ…pe… parāyaṇo. So dve vā tīṇi vā kulāni sandhāvitvā saṃsaritvā dukkhassantaṃ karoti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo kolaṃkolo’’ti (pu. pa. 32).
在这里,“家”指的是“有”(生存境界)。“两个或三个”在这里只是说法上的方便表达而已。即使流转到第六个有,也仍然是家家者。巴利
Tattha kulānīti bhave. Dve vā tīṇi vāti idamettha desanāmattameva. Yāva chaṭṭhabhavā saṃsarantopi kolaṃkolo hoti eva.
如果有人流转于七种存在之中,最后终结了苦,这种人就叫作“极七次者”。就像所说的那样:巴利
Yo pana satta bhave saṃsaritvā dukkhassantaṃ karoti, ayaṃ sattakkhattuparamo nāma. Yathāha –
什么样的人叫“极七次者”呢?在这里,有一类人……(中略)……以正觉为归宿。他在天界和人间来回流转轮回七次之后,就彻底终结了苦。这样的人就叫做“极七次者”。巴利
‘‘Katamo ca puggalo sattakkhattuparamo? Idhekacco…pe… parāyaṇo. So sattakkhattuṃ deve ceva mānuse ca sandhāvitvā saṃsaritvā dukkhassantaṃ karoti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo sattakkhattuparamo’’ti (pu. pa. 31).
那么,是谁决定了他们这种分类呢?有些人说:“是由前世因缘决定的。”有些人说:“是由初道决定的。”有些人说:“是由上面三道决定的。”还有些人说:“是由三道的观决定的。”在这些说法中,如果按“前世因缘决定”的说法,那就意味着初道的亲依止已经被造作了,这样一来,上面三道就成了没有亲依止也能生起。如果按“初道决定”的说法,上面三道就变得毫无作用了。如果按“上面三道决定”的说法,就会得出“初道还没生起时,上面三道就已经生起了”的结论。而“由观决定”这个说法才是合理的。因为,如果后三道的观力强,就成为“一种子者”;观力比这弱一些的,成为“家家者”;再弱一些的,就成为“极七次者”。在这里,无论只是在人间流转七次就证得阿罗汉果的,还是只在天界流转七次就证得阿罗汉果的,都不是这里所说的“极七次者”。只有那种有时投生天界、有时投生人间,以天人混杂的方式流转七次才证得阿罗汉果的人,才是这里所指的。因此,“极七次者”这个说法在这里应当理解为是依据具有八地混杂轮回意欲的人而说的。因为具有轮回意欲的人,从一开始就会净化六层天界,最终住于阿迦尼吒天而般涅槃。巴利
Ko pana tesaṃ etaṃ pabhedaṃ niyametīti? Keci tāva ‘‘pubbahetu niyametī’’ti vadanti. Keci ‘‘paṭhamamaggo’’, keci ‘‘upari tayo maggā’’. Keci ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vipassanā’’ti. Tattha pubbahetu niyametīti vāde paṭhamamaggassa upanissayo kato nāma hoti. Upari tayo maggā nirupanissayā uppannāti āpajjati. Paṭhamamaggo niyametīti vāde upari tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ niratthakatā āpajjati. Upari tayo maggā niyamentīti vāde ‘‘paṭhamamagge anuppanne eva upari tayo maggā uppannā’’ti āpajjati. Vipassanā niyametīti vādo pana yujjati. Sace hi upari tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vipassanā balavatī hoti, ekabījī nāma hoti. Tato mandatarā kolaṃkolo. Tato mandatarā sattakkhattuparamoti. Ettha ca yo manussesu eva sattakkhattuṃ saṃsaritvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, yo ca devesuyeva sattakkhattuṃ saṃsaritvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, ime na idhādhippetā. Yo pana kālena devesu, kālena manussesūti vomissakanayena saṃsaritvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, so idhādhippeto. Tasmā ‘‘sattakkhattuparamo’’ti idaṃ idhaṭṭhakavokiṇṇavaṭṭajjhāsayassa vasena veditabbaṃ. Vaṭṭajjhāsayo hi ādito paṭṭhāya cha devaloke sodhetvā akaniṭṭhe ṭhatvā parinibbāyissati.
在这里,如果有人以信为首要,生起入流道,那么在道的那一刹那,他就叫作随信行。但在果的那一刹那,他成为信解脱者,然后按前面所说的方式,分成一种子者等不同类别。如果有人以慧为首要,生起入流道,那么在道的那一刹那,他就叫作随法行。但在果的那一刹那,他成为见至者,同样分成一种子者等不同类别。这是针对还没有获得八解脱的人来说的。至于已经获得八解脱的人,在果的那一刹那,就叫作身证者。在这里,那些名为信解脱者、见至者和身证者的三种入流者,都归入一种子者等三类之中,因此说:“应当用五种补特伽罗来说明——即一种子者……中略……随法行者。”这样,就是用五种补特伽罗来说明。巴利
Tattha yo saddhaṃ dhuraṃ katvā sotāpattimaggaṃ nibbatteti, so maggakkhaṇe saddhānusārī nāma hoti. Phalakkhaṇe pana saddhāvimutto nāma hutvā vuttanayena ekabījiādibhedo hoti. Yo pana paññaṃ dhuraṃ katvā sotāpattimaggaṃ nibbatteti, so maggakkhaṇe dhammānusārī nāma. Phalakkhaṇe pana diṭṭhippatto nāma hutvā ekabījiādibhedo hoti. Idañca aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ alābhino vasena vuttaṃ. Lābhī pana phalakkhaṇe kāyasakkhī nāma hoti. Tattha ye saddhāvimuttadiṭṭhippattakāyasakkhināmakā tayo sotāpannā, te ekabījiādīhi tīheva saṅgahetvā vuttaṃ – ‘‘pañcahi puggalehi niddisitabbaṃ ekabījinā…pe… dhammānusārinā’’ti, evaṃ pañcahi.
所谓“以十二种补特伽罗”,是指:一来道位者、一来者、不来道位者,以及不加细分的“不来者”,再把不来者细分为中般涅槃者等五种,加上信解脱者、见至者、身证者三种,这样合计十二种。其中,在无烦天等天界投生后,还没活到那里天寿的一半就般涅槃的,叫“中般涅槃者”。而超过天寿一半之后才证得阿罗汉果的,叫“生般涅槃者”。同样,投生到无烦天等处后,不靠加行、不靠特别努力就证得阿罗汉果的,叫“无行般涅槃者”。需要加行、需要特别努力才证得阿罗汉果的,叫“有行般涅槃者”。他的再生之流一直向上、再向上,直到梵天界,所以叫“上流者”。从结生的角度说,他将前往色究竟天,所以叫“去色究竟者”。巴利
Dvādasahipuggalehīti sakadāgāmimaggaṭṭho, sakadāgāmī, anāgāmimaggaṭṭho, abhedena anāgāmī, antarāparinibbāyiādayo pañca, saddhāvimuttadiṭṭhippattakāyasakkhino tayoti bhedena aṭṭhāti, evaṃ dvādasahi. Tattha hi yo avihādīsu tattha tattha āyuvemajjhaṃ appatvā parinibbāyati, ayaṃ antarāparinibbāyī. Yo pana āyuvemajjhaṃ atikkamitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, ayaṃ upahaccaparinibbāyī. Tathā yo avihādīsu upapanno asaṅkhārena appayogena arahattaṃ adhigacchati, ayaṃ asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī. Yo pana sasaṅkhārena sappayogena arahattaṃ adhigacchati, ayaṃ sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī. Uddhaṃ uparūpari brahmaloke upapattisoto etassāti uddhaṃsoto. Paṭisandhivasena akaniṭṭhe gacchatīti akaniṭṭhagāmī.
在这里,有“上流且去色究竟天者”,有“上流但不去色究竟天者”,有“非上流而去色究竟天者”,有“非上流也不去色究竟天者”。其中,如果有人在这一教法中证得不来果,投生到无烦天等处,在那里住满寿命后,再一层一层往上投生,最终到达色究竟天,这个人就叫“上流且去色究竟天者”。如果有人投生到无烦天等处后,没有在那里般涅槃,也没有到达色究竟天,而是在更高的梵天界般涅槃,这个人就叫“上流但不去色究竟天者”。如果有人从这一世死后,直接投生到色究竟天,这个人就叫“非上流而去色究竟天者”。如果有人投生到无烦天等四天中的任何一处后,就在那里般涅槃,这个人就叫“非上流也不去色究竟天者”。至于信解脱者等的分类,则和前面所说的一样。巴利
Tattha atthi uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī atthi uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmī, atthi na uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī atthi na uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmīti. Tattha yo idha anāgāmiphalaṃ patvā avihādīsu nibbatto tattha yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā uparūpari nibbattitvā akaniṭṭhaṃ pāpuṇāti, ayaṃ uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo pana avihādīsu nibbatto tattheva aparinibbāyitvā akaniṭṭhampi appatvā uparūpari brahmaloke parinibbāyati, ayaṃ uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo ito cavitvā akaniṭṭheyeva nibbattati, ayaṃ na uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo pana avihādīsu catūsu aññatarasmiṃ nibbattitvā tattheva parinibbāyati, ayaṃ na uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Saddhāvimuttādayo vuttavibhāgāyeva.
在“以九种人”这句话里,没有获得八种解脱的阿拉汉,就叫慧解脱。而获得这八种解脱的阿拉汉,因为依镇伏解脱和断除解脱这两种方式,从色身和名身这两方面都得到解脱,所以叫俱分解脱。在“等首”这句话里,等首有三种:威仪等首、病等首、寿等首。巴利
Navahi puggalehīti ettha aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ alābhī arahā paññāvimutto nāma. Tesaṃ pana lābhī vikkhambhanasamucchedavimokkhavasena ubhohi bhāgehi rūpakāyanāmakāyasaṅkhātato ubhato bhāgato vimuttattā ubhatobhāgavimutto nāma. Samasīsināti ettha tividho samasīsī – iriyāpathasamasīsī, rogasamasīsī, jīvitasamasīsīti.
在这里,如果有人以站立等威仪中的某种威仪安住,并依那种威仪开始修观,就以那种威仪证得阿罗汉果,然后般涅槃,这叫作威仪等首者。如果有人患上某种疾病,就在那病中开始修观,证得阿罗汉果后,因为那同样的病而般涅槃,这叫作病等首者。障碍之首是渴爱,束缚之首是我慢,执取之首是邪见,散乱之首是掉举,烦恼之首是无明,胜解之首是信,策励之首是精进,安立之首是念,不散乱之首是定,见之首是慧,运转之首是命根,行境之首是解脱,行法之首是灭。在这十三种首之中,阿罗汉道彻底断尽烦恼之首即无明,死亡心彻底断尽运转之首即命根。其中,断尽无明的心不能断尽命根,断尽命根的心也不能断尽无明。断尽无明的是另一种心,断尽命根的是另一种心。如果对某人来说,这两种首同时达到断尽,他就叫作寿等首者。巴利
Tatra yo ṭhānādīsu iriyāpathesu yeneva iriyāpathena samannāgato hutvā vipassanaṃ ārabhati, teneva iriyāpathena arahattaṃ patvā parinibbāyati, ayaṃ iriyāpathasamasīsī nāma. Yo pana ekaṃ rogaṃ patvā antoroge eva vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ patvā teneva rogena parinibbāyati, ayaṃ rogasamasīsī nāma. Palibodhasīsaṃ taṇhā, bandhanasīsaṃ māno, parāmāsasīsaṃ diṭṭhi, vikkhepasīsaṃ uddhaccaṃ, kilesasīsaṃ avijjā, adhimokkhasīsaṃ saddhā, paggahasīsaṃ vīriyaṃ, upaṭṭhānasīsaṃ sati, avikkhepasīsaṃ samādhi, dassanasīsaṃ paññā, pavattasīsaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ, gocarasīsaṃ vimokkho, saṅkhārasīsaṃ nirodhoti terasasu sīsesu kilesasīsaṃ avijjaṃ arahattamaggo pariyādiyati, pavattasīsaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ cuticittaṃ pariyādiyati. Tattha avijjāpariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ pariyādātuṃ na sakkoti. Jīvitindriyapariyādāyakaṃ avijjaṃ pariyādātuṃ na sakkoti. Aññaṃ avijjāpariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ, aññaṃ jīvitindriyapariyādāyakaṃ. Yassa cetaṃ sīsadvayaṃ samaṃ pariyādānaṃ gacchati, so jīvitasamasīsī nāma.
那么,为什么说这是“同时”呢?因为心的刹那刚好齐平。也就是说,在道生起的那一个心识刹那,入流道后有五种省察,一来道后有五种,不来道后有五种,阿罗汉道后有四种——当他安住在这第十九种省察智之后,沉入有分心而般涅槃。正是由于这种心识刹那的齐平,这两种“首”的同时断尽才叫作“同时”。因此,这样的补特伽罗被称为“寿等首者”,这正是这里所指的意思。这样一来,空解脱者等三种,加上信解脱者、慧解脱者、俱分解脱者、等首者,这七种声闻阿罗汉,以及独觉佛、正自觉者——应当以这九种补特伽罗来解释属于无学分位的经典。巴利
Kathaṃ panidaṃ samaṃ hotīti? Vārasamatāya. Yasmiñhi vāre maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, sotāpattimagge pañca paccavekkhaṇāni, sakadāgāmimagge pañca, anāgāmimagge pañca, arahattamagge cattārīti ekūnavīsatime paccavekkhaṇañāṇe patiṭṭhāya bhavaṅgaṃ otaritvā parinibbāyato imāya vārasamatāya idaṃ ubhayasīsapariyādānampi samaṃ hoti nāma. Tenāyaṃ puggalo ‘‘jīvitasamasīsī’’ti vuccati, ayameva idhādhippeto. Evaṃ suññatavimuttādayo tayo saddhāvimutto paññāvimutto ubhatobhāgavimutto samasīsīti satta sāvakā arahanto, paccekabuddho, sammāsambuddhoti imehi navahi puggalehi asekkhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ niddisitabbaṃ.
贪行者,就是具有与贪相应习性的人。或者说,被贪驱使、被贪推动而行动的人,就是贪行者,意思是内心倾向于贪、以贪为主导。这个解释方式也适用于其余几种。住于贪面前,就是处在贪的缠缚状态中,意思是当下正被贪所缠缚。其余的语句也应当这样理解。巴利
Rāgacaritoti rāgasahitaṃ caritaṃ etassāti rāgacarito. Rāgena vā carito pavattito rāgacarito, rāgajjhāsayo rāgādhikoti attho. Esa nayo sesesupi. Rāgamukhe ṭhitoti rāgapariyuṭṭhāne ṭhito, pariyuṭṭhitarāgoti attho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.
所谓“习气部分”的经,是指属于世间、以众生为所依的习气部分经。因为,以世间和众生为所依的杂染部分经,是由贪行者等人所指示的。在这里,承接“世间”和“众生所依”这两个词,才说了“习气部分”。“以持戒者等”,是指持戒者等人。而“自然戒”等,是指具足这些法的人。举出他们,是为了标示出这类人。或者也可以说,为了显示:法所依应当从自然戒等方面来理解,众生所依应当从自然持戒者等方面来理解,所以先说了“应以持戒者来说明”,然后才说“自然戒”等。这里举出自然戒等五种,只是一个示例,因为功德回向、随喜、听法、说法、令见正直之业等也都有可能适用。又或者说,正是为了把这些也统摄进来并加以显示,才说了“五种”。巴利
Vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttanti lokiyaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ. Lokiyaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyañhi suttaṃ rāgacaritehi puggalehi niddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘lokiyaṃ, sattādhiṭṭhāna’’nti padadvayaṃ anuvattamānaṃ katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘vāsanābhāgiya’’nti. Sīlavantehīti sīlavantādīhi puggalehi. Pakatisīlantiādi yehi samannāgatā, te puggalā. Tesaṃ dassanena puggalānaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ. Atha vā dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ pakatisīlādivasena, sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ pakatisīlavantādivasena veditabbanti imassa nayassa dassanatthaṃ ‘‘sīlavantehi niddisitabba’’nti vatvā ‘‘pakatisīla’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ pakatisīlādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ eva gahaṇaṃ nidassanamattaṃ, pattidānaabbhanumodanadhammassavanadesanādiṭṭhijukammādīnampi cettha sambhavato. Tesampi vā ettheva saṅgahetvā dassanatthaṃ ‘‘pañcā’’ti vuttaṃ.
在这里,自然戒是指具足远离的戒。心净信是指对业果的信心和对三宝的信心。应当以智来说明智:凡是经典里出现了慧,那部经典就应当以智来说明。不只是用慧这个同义词,而是为了说明凡是以慧根等异名出现慧的经典,那部经典也应当以智来说明,所以才说了慧根等。它的含义前面已经说过。或者,凡是还有其他任何对慧的称呼,无论它出现在哪部经典里,那部经典都应当以智来说明,这就是它的意思。巴利
Tattha pakatisīlanti sampattaviratisīlaṃ. Cittappasādoti kammaphalasaddhā ratanattayasaddhā ca. Ñāṇaṃ paññāya niddisitabbanti yasmiṃ sutte paññā āgatā, taṃ suttaṃ ñāṇanti niddisitabbaṃ. Na kevalaṃ paññāpariyāyeneva, atha kho paññindriyādipariyāyenapi yattha paññā āgatā, taṃ suttaṃ ñāṇanti niddisitabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘paññindriyenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho – heṭṭhā vutto eva. Yaṃ vā panātiādīsu yaṃ vā aññaṃ kiñci paññāya adhivacanaṃ. Sabbaṃ taṃ yattha katthaci sutte āgataṃ, taṃ suttaṃ ñāṇanti niddisitabbanti attho.
对于“内与外”这句:在哪部经里提到了内处和外处,那部经就应当依据这些处,被说明为“智”和“所知”。慧本身作为所缘,也是所知,所以这里把慧单独提出来,作为所知来说。事实上,正如“慧是其他智的所缘”,在某些经里,慧也是以所知的身份被说到的。“凡是作为所缘的”,是指凡是成为智的对象的东西,比如色等。“内或外”里的“或”字,还包括了粗、细等分类。“所有这一切,以有为与无为”,意思是:所有这一切,按各自可能的情况,以有为的性质和无为的性质,都应当被说明为“所知”。因为正是依据所知法,所知经才被称为“所知”。巴利
Ajjhattikabāhirehīti yasmiṃ sutte ajjhattikāni āyatanāni, bāhirāni ca āyatanāni āgatāni, taṃ suttaṃ tehi āyatanehi ñāṇaṃ ñeyyanti niddisitabbaṃ. Paññāpi ārammaṇabhūtā ñeyyanti ñeyyato visuṃ katvā paññā vuttā. Tathā hi paññā ñāṇantarassa ārammaṇanti katthaci sutte ñeyyabhāvenapi vuccati. Yaṃ kiñci ārammaṇabhūtanti yaṃ kiñci ñāṇassa visayabhūtaṃ rūpādi. Ajjhattikaṃ vā bāhiraṃ vāti vā-saddena oḷārikādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Sabbaṃ taṃ saṅkhatena asaṅkhatena cāti sabbaṃ taṃ yathāsambhavaṃ saṅkhatabhāvena asaṅkhatabhāvena ca ñeyyanti niddisitabbaṃ. Ñeyyadhammavasena hi ñeyyasuttaṃ ñeyyanti vuccatīti.
世尊无论宣说任何一段言说,在世间、出世间等经典中,一部经里可能有两种情况。其中,如果世尊以某一种方式单独宣说、指明某一段言说,那么这一切都应按照所指明的那样去持守。意思是:那一切经典,不论是在世间等类别中属于单一方式,还是兼具两种方式,都应按照所指明的方式去把握;也就是说,应当以相应的重点来指明。巴利
Yaṃ vā pana kiñci bhagavā aññataravacanaṃ bhāsatīti lokiyalokuttarādisuttesu ekasmiṃ sutte dve. Tesu yaṃ vā pana kiñci aññataravacanaṃ ekasseva kathanaṃ bhāsati niddisati. Sabbaṃ taṃ yathāniddiṭṭhaṃ dhārayitabbanti taṃ yathā sabbaṃ suttaṃ lokiyādīsu yadi aññataravasena, atha ubhayavasena yathā yathā niddiṭṭhaṃ, tathā tathā gahetabbaṃ, taṃ taṃ padhānabhāvena niddisitabbanti attho.
只有与烦恼相应的业才是果报的因,别的不是,所以论中说“因有两种,就是业和烦恼”。这里“集”指烦恼,用“集”这个词来指属于集谛那一类的法。“烦恼”则是指有烦恼的、被染污的意思。“凡是所见的”,就是无论见到什么。“在各地中”,指在凡夫地等各个阶段。“以合乎法与合乎法随顺”,就是通过合乎法和合乎法随顺两者来说明。其中,合乎法是从圣典中直接按其本身的样子说出来的,合乎法随顺则是依据四大教法从理路上展示出来的。“以被禁止的原因”,就是世尊以什么理由禁止某事物,就用那个理由来说明它。因为世尊绝对遮止的,正是会导向贪等烦恼的法,所以应当以“这会引生贪”等理由来说明它。“法的”,指无为法。“圣法的”,指道与果之法。其余部分很容易理解。巴利
Kilesasahitaññeva kammaṃ vipākassa hetu, na itaranti vuttaṃ ‘‘duvidho hetu yañca kammaṃ ye ca kilesā’’ti. Samudayo kilesāti ettha ‘‘samudayo’’ti etena samudayapakkhiyā vuttā. ‘‘Kilesā’’ti ca kilesavanto, saṃkiliṭṭhāti attho. Yaṃ dissatīti yaṃ yaṃ dissati. Tāsu tāsu bhūmīsūti puthujjanabhūmiādīsu. Kappiyānulomenāti kappiyena ca kappiyānulomena ca. Tattha kappiyaṃ pāḷiyaṃ sarūpato vuttaṃ, kappiyānulomaṃ mahāpadesavasena nayato dassitaṃ. Paṭikkhittakāraṇenāti yena kāraṇena bhagavatā yaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ, tena kāraṇena taṃ niddisitabbaṃ. Ekantena sarāgādisaṃvattanameva hi bhagavatā paṭikkhittaṃ, taṃ sarāgāya saṃvattanādikāraṇena niddisitabbaṃ . Dhammassāti asaṅkhatadhammassa. Ariyadhammānanti maggaphaladhammānaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
在这里,正如杂染分等法因为彼此相互关联,而被认可有多种多样的论母分类;同样地,因为世间、众生所依等法的相互关联,也会产生多种多样的论母分类。不过,在巴利圣典中,这两个方面都只是通过显示一部分的方式来呈现,所以应当知道,这只是示现一种理路。因为有能力的人确实可以依照这个理路,把那些论母都确定下来。而且,正如杂染分等法和世间法等各自分开,依照它们相互关联的类别,这些论母分类可以多种多样地获得;同样地,这两大类之间依照它们的关联,这个理路也随其所应地可以获得。因为世间经典中,有些属于杂染分,有些属于习气分;同样地,出世间经典中,有些属于抉择分,有些属于无学分。其余的也应当依此类推。巴利
Ettha ca yathā saṃkilesabhāgiyādīnaṃ aññamaññaṃ saṃsaggato anekavidho paṭṭhānabhedo icchito, evaṃ lokiyasattādhiṭṭhānādisaṃsaggatopi anekavidho paṭṭhānabhedo sambhavati. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ubhayatthāpi ekadesadassanavasena āgatattā nayadassananti veditabbaṃ. Sakkā hi iminā nayena viññunā te niddhāretunti. Yathā ca saṃkilesabhāgiyādīnaṃ lokiyādīnañca visuṃ visuṃ saṃsaggabhedavasena ayaṃ paṭṭhānabhedo anekavidho labbhati, evaṃ ubhayesampi saṃsaggavasena ayaṃ nayo yathārahaṃ labbhateva. Labbhati hi lokiyaṃ suttaṃ kiñci saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ, kiñci vāsanābhāgiyaṃ. Tathā lokuttaraṃ suttaṃ kiñci nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ, kiñci asekkhabhāgiyanti. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
在十六种论母中归入二十八种论母,又在二十八种论母中归入十六种论母之后,应当依照二法、三法等的分类,按各自适用的方式,从可能成立的角度来理解论母的分别。而且,这要以三藏中能找到的经文语句为依据。不过,如果把那些经文语句一一举出来作例子,详细阐明这个义理,就会变得过于繁琐,《导论》的注释也会变得过于沉重;而有智慧的人用这个理路就能理解这个义理,所以我们没有详细展开。正因为如此,圣典中只是通过彼此部分结合的方式,显示了论母的分别,并没有毫无遗漏地全部显示出来。巴利
Evaṃ soḷasavidhe paṭṭhāne aṭṭhavīsatividhaṃ paṭṭhānaṃ pakkhipitvā, aṭṭhavīsatividhe ca paṭṭhāne soḷasavidhaṃ pakkhipitvā yathārahaṃ dukatikādibhedena sambhavato paṭṭhānavibhāgo veditabbo, so ca kho tīsu piṭakesu labbhamānassa suttapadassa vasena. Yasmā pana tāni tāni suttapadāni udāharaṇavasena niddhāretvā imasmiṃ atthe vitthāriyamāne atipapañco hoti, atibhāriyā ca nettisaṃvaṇṇanā, sakkā ca iminā nayena viññunā ayamattho viññātuṃ, tasmā na taṃ vitthārayimha. Teneva hi pāḷiyaṃ aññamaññasaṃsaggavasena paṭṭhānavibhāgo ekadeseneva dassito, na nippadesatoti.
在导引、方式和发趣中,作极清净的抉择;
分别解说九分教,即对教法义理的阐释。
智者能通达这部甚深又精微的《导论》。
大长老摩诃迦旃延,这位得自在者,宣说了它。
在名为龙城的正法入门之地,
我住在法阿育大王精舍时。
为了让其义理能长久流传,我着手撰写这部义注。
对诸譬喻经以及一切特相,都作了详尽的说明。
她阐明含义,判断清晰不乱。
巴利圣典的二十七诵分已经圆满完成。
就这样,当我整理这部论典时,我所证得的那一切;
以这功德的威力,世间怙主的教法。
深入清净的戒等修行之后,
愿一切有身体的众生,都能成为解脱味的分享者。
愿正自觉者的教法在世间长久住立。
愿一切众生永远对那教法怀有恭敬。
愿天适时降下好雨,愿天神与世界之主也。
愿那位乐于正法者,唯以正法来治理世间。巴利
Hāre naye ca paṭṭhāne, suvisuddhavinicchayaṃ; Vibhajanto navaṅgassa, sāsanassatthavaṇṇanaṃ. Nettippakaraṇaṃ dhīro, gambhīraṃ nipuṇañca yaṃ; Adesayi mahāthero, mahākaccāyano vasī. Saddhammāvataraṭṭhāne, paṭṭane nāgasavhaye; Dhammāsokamahārāja-vihāre vasatā mayā. Ciraṭṭhitatthaṃ yā tassa, āraddhā atthavaṇṇanā; Udāharaṇasuttānaṃ, lakkhaṇānañca sabbaso. Atthaṃ pakāsayantī sā, anākulavinicchayā; Samattā sattavīsāya, pāḷiyā bhāṇavārato. Iti taṃ saṅkharontena, yaṃ taṃ adhigataṃ mayā; Puññaṃ tassānubhāvena, lokanāthassa sāsanaṃ. Ogāhetvā visuddhāya, sīlādipaṭipattiyā; Sabbepi dehino hontu, vimuttirasabhāgino. Ciraṃ tiṭṭhatu lokasmiṃ, sammāsambuddhasāsanaṃ; Tasmiṃ sagāravā niccaṃ, hontu sabbepi pāṇino. Sammā vassatu kālena, devopi jagatīpati; Saddhammanirato lokaṃ, dhammeneva pasāsatūti.